summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/21810.txt
blob: ac8bbde0e1182ae16224ef1cf9238e9ddd726bb4 (plain)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
991
992
993
994
995
996
997
998
999
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088
1089
1090
1091
1092
1093
1094
1095
1096
1097
1098
1099
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
1117
1118
1119
1120
1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150
1151
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
1177
1178
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
1239
1240
1241
1242
1243
1244
1245
1246
1247
1248
1249
1250
1251
1252
1253
1254
1255
1256
1257
1258
1259
1260
1261
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
1290
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
1352
1353
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
1362
1363
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
1382
1383
1384
1385
1386
1387
1388
1389
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
1417
1418
1419
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
1431
1432
1433
1434
1435
1436
1437
1438
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448
1449
1450
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456
1457
1458
1459
1460
1461
1462
1463
1464
1465
1466
1467
1468
1469
1470
1471
1472
1473
1474
1475
1476
1477
1478
1479
1480
1481
1482
1483
1484
1485
1486
1487
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
1899
1900
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910
1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917
1918
1919
1920
1921
1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949
1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2037
2038
2039
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048
2049
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
2060
2061
2062
2063
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
2116
2117
2118
2119
2120
2121
2122
2123
2124
2125
2126
2127
2128
2129
2130
2131
2132
2133
2134
2135
2136
2137
2138
2139
2140
2141
2142
2143
2144
2145
2146
2147
2148
2149
2150
2151
2152
2153
2154
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
2170
2171
2172
2173
2174
2175
2176
2177
2178
2179
2180
2181
2182
2183
2184
2185
2186
2187
2188
2189
2190
2191
2192
2193
2194
2195
2196
2197
2198
2199
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
2249
2250
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258
2259
2260
2261
2262
2263
2264
2265
2266
2267
2268
2269
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2275
2276
2277
2278
2279
2280
2281
2282
2283
2284
2285
2286
2287
2288
2289
2290
2291
2292
2293
2294
2295
2296
2297
2298
2299
2300
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
2310
2311
2312
2313
2314
2315
2316
2317
2318
2319
2320
2321
2322
2323
2324
2325
2326
2327
2328
2329
2330
2331
2332
2333
2334
2335
2336
2337
2338
2339
2340
2341
2342
2343
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
2350
2351
2352
2353
2354
2355
2356
2357
2358
2359
2360
2361
2362
2363
2364
2365
2366
2367
2368
2369
2370
2371
2372
2373
2374
2375
2376
2377
2378
2379
2380
2381
2382
2383
2384
2385
2386
2387
2388
2389
2390
2391
2392
2393
2394
2395
2396
2397
2398
2399
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414
2415
2416
2417
2418
2419
2420
2421
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2428
2429
2430
2431
2432
2433
2434
2435
2436
2437
2438
2439
2440
2441
2442
2443
2444
2445
2446
2447
2448
2449
2450
2451
2452
2453
2454
2455
2456
2457
2458
2459
2460
2461
2462
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
2469
2470
2471
2472
2473
2474
2475
2476
2477
2478
2479
2480
2481
2482
2483
2484
2485
2486
2487
2488
2489
2490
2491
2492
2493
2494
2495
2496
2497
2498
2499
2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
2510
2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
2516
2517
2518
2519
2520
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
2530
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
2536
2537
2538
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560
2561
2562
2563
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624
2625
2626
2627
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632
2633
2634
2635
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640
2641
2642
2643
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656
2657
2658
2659
2660
2661
2662
2663
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686
2687
2688
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816
2817
2818
2819
2820
2821
2822
2823
2824
2825
2826
2827
2828
2829
2830
2831
2832
2833
2834
2835
2836
2837
2838
2839
2840
2841
2842
2843
2844
2845
2846
2847
2848
2849
2850
2851
2852
2853
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2859
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2865
2866
2867
2868
2869
2870
2871
2872
2873
2874
2875
2876
2877
2878
2879
2880
2881
2882
2883
2884
2885
2886
2887
2888
2889
2890
2891
2892
2893
2894
2895
2896
2897
2898
2899
2900
2901
2902
2903
2904
2905
2906
2907
2908
2909
2910
2911
2912
2913
2914
2915
2916
2917
2918
2919
2920
2921
2922
2923
2924
2925
2926
2927
2928
2929
2930
2931
2932
2933
2934
2935
2936
2937
2938
2939
2940
2941
2942
2943
2944
2945
2946
2947
2948
2949
2950
2951
2952
2953
2954
2955
2956
2957
2958
2959
2960
2961
2962
2963
2964
2965
2966
2967
2968
2969
2970
2971
2972
2973
2974
2975
2976
2977
2978
2979
2980
2981
2982
2983
2984
2985
2986
2987
2988
2989
2990
2991
2992
2993
2994
2995
2996
2997
2998
2999
3000
3001
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
3008
3009
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020
3021
3022
3023
3024
3025
3026
3027
3028
3029
3030
3031
3032
3033
3034
3035
3036
3037
3038
3039
3040
3041
3042
3043
3044
3045
3046
3047
3048
3049
3050
3051
3052
3053
3054
3055
3056
3057
3058
3059
3060
3061
3062
3063
3064
3065
3066
3067
3068
3069
3070
3071
3072
3073
3074
3075
3076
3077
3078
3079
3080
3081
3082
3083
3084
3085
3086
3087
3088
3089
3090
3091
3092
3093
3094
3095
3096
3097
3098
3099
3100
3101
3102
3103
3104
3105
3106
3107
3108
3109
3110
3111
3112
3113
3114
3115
3116
3117
3118
3119
3120
3121
3122
3123
3124
3125
3126
3127
3128
3129
3130
3131
3132
3133
3134
3135
3136
3137
3138
3139
3140
3141
3142
3143
3144
3145
3146
3147
3148
3149
3150
3151
3152
3153
3154
3155
3156
3157
3158
3159
3160
3161
3162
3163
3164
3165
3166
3167
3168
3169
3170
3171
3172
3173
3174
3175
3176
3177
3178
3179
3180
3181
3182
3183
3184
3185
3186
3187
3188
3189
3190
3191
3192
3193
3194
3195
3196
3197
3198
3199
3200
3201
3202
3203
3204
3205
3206
3207
3208
3209
3210
3211
3212
3213
3214
3215
3216
3217
3218
3219
3220
3221
3222
3223
3224
3225
3226
3227
3228
3229
3230
3231
3232
3233
3234
3235
3236
3237
3238
3239
3240
3241
3242
3243
3244
3245
3246
3247
3248
3249
3250
3251
3252
3253
3254
3255
3256
3257
3258
3259
3260
3261
3262
3263
3264
3265
3266
3267
3268
3269
3270
3271
3272
3273
3274
3275
3276
3277
3278
3279
3280
3281
3282
3283
3284
3285
3286
3287
3288
3289
3290
3291
3292
3293
3294
3295
3296
3297
3298
3299
3300
3301
3302
3303
3304
3305
3306
3307
3308
3309
3310
3311
3312
3313
3314
3315
3316
3317
3318
3319
3320
3321
3322
3323
3324
3325
3326
3327
3328
3329
3330
3331
3332
3333
3334
3335
3336
3337
3338
3339
3340
3341
3342
3343
3344
3345
3346
3347
3348
3349
3350
3351
3352
3353
3354
3355
3356
3357
3358
3359
3360
3361
3362
3363
3364
3365
3366
3367
3368
3369
3370
3371
3372
3373
3374
3375
3376
3377
3378
3379
3380
3381
3382
3383
3384
3385
3386
3387
3388
3389
3390
3391
3392
3393
3394
3395
3396
3397
3398
3399
3400
3401
3402
3403
3404
3405
3406
3407
3408
3409
3410
3411
3412
3413
3414
3415
3416
3417
3418
3419
3420
3421
3422
3423
3424
3425
3426
3427
3428
3429
3430
3431
3432
3433
3434
3435
3436
3437
3438
3439
3440
3441
3442
3443
3444
3445
3446
3447
3448
3449
3450
3451
3452
3453
3454
3455
3456
3457
3458
3459
3460
3461
3462
3463
3464
3465
3466
3467
3468
3469
3470
3471
3472
3473
3474
3475
3476
3477
3478
3479
3480
3481
3482
3483
3484
3485
3486
3487
3488
3489
3490
3491
3492
3493
3494
3495
3496
3497
3498
3499
3500
3501
3502
3503
3504
3505
3506
3507
3508
3509
3510
3511
3512
3513
3514
3515
3516
3517
3518
3519
3520
3521
3522
3523
3524
3525
3526
3527
3528
3529
3530
3531
3532
3533
3534
3535
3536
3537
3538
3539
3540
3541
3542
3543
3544
3545
3546
3547
3548
3549
3550
3551
3552
3553
3554
3555
3556
3557
3558
3559
3560
3561
3562
3563
3564
3565
3566
3567
3568
3569
3570
3571
3572
3573
3574
3575
3576
3577
3578
3579
3580
3581
3582
3583
3584
3585
3586
3587
3588
3589
3590
3591
3592
3593
3594
3595
3596
3597
3598
3599
3600
3601
3602
3603
3604
3605
3606
3607
3608
3609
3610
3611
3612
3613
3614
3615
3616
3617
3618
3619
3620
3621
3622
3623
3624
3625
3626
3627
3628
3629
3630
3631
3632
3633
3634
3635
3636
3637
3638
3639
3640
3641
3642
3643
3644
3645
3646
3647
3648
3649
3650
3651
3652
3653
3654
3655
3656
3657
3658
3659
3660
3661
3662
3663
3664
3665
3666
3667
3668
3669
3670
3671
3672
3673
3674
3675
3676
3677
3678
3679
3680
3681
3682
3683
3684
3685
3686
3687
3688
3689
3690
3691
3692
3693
3694
3695
3696
3697
3698
3699
3700
3701
3702
3703
3704
3705
3706
3707
3708
3709
3710
3711
3712
3713
3714
3715
3716
3717
3718
3719
3720
3721
3722
3723
3724
3725
3726
3727
3728
3729
3730
3731
3732
3733
3734
3735
3736
3737
3738
3739
3740
3741
3742
3743
3744
3745
3746
3747
3748
3749
3750
3751
3752
3753
3754
3755
3756
3757
3758
3759
3760
3761
3762
3763
3764
3765
3766
3767
3768
3769
3770
3771
3772
3773
3774
3775
3776
3777
3778
3779
3780
3781
3782
3783
3784
3785
3786
3787
3788
3789
3790
3791
3792
3793
3794
3795
3796
3797
3798
3799
3800
3801
3802
3803
3804
3805
3806
3807
3808
3809
3810
3811
3812
3813
3814
3815
3816
3817
3818
3819
3820
3821
3822
3823
3824
3825
3826
3827
3828
3829
3830
3831
3832
3833
3834
3835
3836
3837
3838
3839
3840
3841
3842
3843
3844
3845
3846
3847
3848
3849
3850
3851
3852
3853
3854
3855
3856
3857
3858
3859
3860
3861
3862
3863
3864
3865
3866
3867
3868
3869
3870
3871
3872
3873
3874
3875
3876
3877
3878
3879
3880
3881
3882
3883
3884
3885
3886
3887
3888
3889
3890
3891
3892
3893
3894
3895
3896
3897
3898
3899
3900
3901
3902
3903
3904
3905
3906
3907
3908
3909
3910
3911
3912
3913
3914
3915
3916
3917
3918
3919
3920
3921
3922
3923
3924
3925
3926
3927
3928
3929
3930
3931
3932
3933
3934
3935
3936
3937
3938
3939
3940
3941
3942
3943
3944
3945
3946
3947
3948
3949
3950
3951
3952
3953
3954
3955
3956
3957
3958
3959
3960
3961
3962
3963
3964
3965
3966
3967
3968
3969
3970
3971
3972
3973
3974
3975
3976
3977
3978
3979
3980
3981
3982
3983
3984
3985
3986
3987
3988
3989
3990
3991
3992
3993
3994
3995
3996
3997
3998
3999
4000
4001
4002
4003
4004
4005
4006
4007
4008
4009
4010
4011
4012
4013
4014
4015
4016
4017
4018
4019
4020
4021
4022
4023
4024
4025
4026
4027
4028
4029
4030
4031
4032
4033
4034
4035
4036
4037
4038
4039
4040
4041
4042
4043
4044
4045
4046
4047
4048
4049
4050
4051
4052
4053
4054
4055
4056
4057
4058
4059
4060
4061
4062
4063
4064
4065
4066
4067
4068
4069
4070
4071
4072
4073
4074
4075
4076
4077
4078
4079
4080
4081
4082
4083
4084
4085
4086
4087
4088
4089
4090
4091
4092
4093
4094
4095
4096
4097
4098
4099
4100
4101
4102
4103
4104
4105
4106
4107
4108
4109
4110
4111
4112
4113
4114
4115
4116
4117
4118
4119
4120
4121
4122
4123
4124
4125
4126
4127
4128
4129
4130
4131
4132
4133
4134
4135
4136
4137
4138
4139
4140
4141
4142
4143
4144
4145
4146
4147
4148
4149
4150
4151
4152
4153
4154
4155
4156
4157
4158
4159
4160
4161
4162
4163
4164
4165
4166
4167
4168
4169
4170
4171
4172
4173
4174
4175
4176
4177
4178
4179
4180
4181
4182
4183
4184
4185
4186
4187
4188
4189
4190
4191
4192
4193
4194
4195
4196
4197
4198
4199
4200
4201
4202
4203
4204
4205
4206
4207
4208
4209
4210
4211
4212
4213
4214
4215
4216
4217
4218
4219
4220
4221
4222
4223
4224
4225
4226
4227
4228
4229
4230
4231
4232
4233
4234
4235
4236
4237
4238
4239
4240
4241
4242
4243
4244
4245
4246
4247
4248
4249
4250
4251
4252
4253
4254
4255
4256
4257
4258
4259
4260
4261
4262
4263
4264
4265
4266
4267
4268
4269
4270
4271
4272
4273
4274
4275
4276
4277
4278
4279
4280
4281
4282
4283
4284
4285
4286
4287
4288
4289
4290
4291
4292
4293
4294
4295
4296
4297
4298
4299
4300
4301
4302
4303
4304
4305
4306
4307
4308
4309
4310
4311
4312
4313
4314
4315
4316
4317
4318
4319
4320
4321
4322
4323
4324
4325
4326
4327
4328
4329
4330
4331
4332
4333
4334
4335
4336
4337
4338
4339
4340
4341
4342
4343
4344
4345
4346
4347
4348
4349
4350
4351
4352
4353
4354
4355
4356
4357
4358
4359
4360
4361
4362
4363
4364
4365
4366
4367
4368
4369
4370
4371
4372
4373
4374
4375
4376
4377
4378
4379
4380
4381
4382
4383
4384
4385
4386
4387
4388
4389
4390
4391
4392
4393
4394
4395
4396
4397
4398
4399
4400
4401
4402
4403
4404
4405
4406
4407
4408
4409
4410
4411
4412
4413
4414
4415
4416
4417
4418
4419
4420
4421
4422
4423
4424
4425
4426
4427
4428
4429
4430
4431
4432
4433
4434
4435
4436
4437
4438
4439
4440
4441
4442
4443
4444
4445
4446
4447
4448
4449
4450
4451
4452
4453
4454
4455
4456
4457
4458
4459
4460
4461
4462
4463
4464
4465
4466
4467
4468
4469
4470
4471
4472
4473
4474
4475
4476
4477
4478
4479
4480
4481
4482
4483
4484
4485
4486
4487
4488
4489
4490
4491
4492
4493
4494
4495
4496
4497
4498
4499
4500
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
4506
4507
4508
4509
4510
4511
4512
4513
4514
4515
4516
4517
4518
4519
4520
4521
4522
4523
4524
4525
4526
4527
4528
4529
4530
4531
4532
4533
4534
4535
4536
4537
4538
4539
4540
4541
4542
4543
4544
4545
4546
4547
4548
4549
4550
4551
4552
4553
4554
4555
4556
4557
4558
4559
4560
4561
4562
4563
4564
4565
4566
4567
4568
4569
4570
4571
4572
4573
4574
4575
4576
4577
4578
4579
4580
4581
4582
4583
4584
4585
4586
4587
4588
4589
4590
4591
4592
4593
4594
4595
4596
4597
4598
4599
4600
4601
4602
4603
4604
4605
4606
4607
4608
4609
4610
4611
4612
4613
4614
4615
4616
4617
4618
4619
4620
4621
4622
4623
4624
4625
4626
4627
4628
4629
4630
4631
4632
4633
4634
4635
4636
4637
4638
4639
4640
4641
4642
4643
4644
4645
4646
4647
4648
4649
4650
4651
4652
4653
4654
4655
4656
4657
4658
4659
4660
4661
4662
4663
4664
4665
4666
4667
4668
4669
4670
4671
4672
4673
4674
4675
4676
4677
4678
4679
4680
4681
4682
4683
4684
4685
4686
4687
4688
4689
4690
4691
4692
4693
4694
4695
4696
4697
4698
4699
4700
4701
4702
4703
4704
4705
4706
4707
4708
4709
4710
4711
4712
4713
4714
4715
4716
4717
4718
4719
4720
4721
4722
4723
4724
4725
4726
4727
4728
4729
4730
4731
4732
4733
4734
4735
4736
4737
4738
4739
4740
4741
4742
4743
4744
4745
4746
4747
4748
4749
4750
4751
4752
4753
4754
4755
4756
4757
4758
4759
4760
4761
4762
4763
4764
4765
4766
4767
4768
4769
4770
4771
4772
4773
4774
4775
4776
4777
4778
4779
4780
4781
4782
4783
4784
4785
4786
4787
4788
4789
4790
4791
4792
4793
4794
4795
4796
4797
4798
4799
4800
4801
4802
4803
4804
4805
4806
4807
4808
4809
4810
4811
4812
4813
4814
4815
4816
4817
4818
4819
4820
4821
4822
4823
4824
4825
4826
4827
4828
4829
4830
4831
4832
4833
4834
4835
4836
4837
4838
4839
4840
4841
4842
4843
4844
4845
4846
4847
4848
4849
4850
4851
4852
4853
4854
4855
4856
4857
4858
4859
4860
4861
4862
4863
4864
4865
4866
4867
4868
4869
4870
4871
4872
4873
4874
4875
4876
4877
4878
4879
4880
4881
4882
4883
4884
4885
4886
4887
4888
4889
4890
4891
4892
4893
4894
4895
4896
4897
4898
4899
4900
4901
4902
4903
4904
4905
4906
4907
4908
4909
4910
4911
4912
4913
4914
4915
4916
4917
4918
4919
4920
4921
4922
4923
4924
4925
4926
4927
4928
4929
4930
4931
4932
4933
4934
4935
4936
4937
4938
4939
4940
4941
4942
4943
4944
4945
4946
4947
4948
4949
4950
4951
4952
4953
4954
4955
4956
4957
4958
4959
4960
4961
4962
4963
4964
4965
4966
4967
4968
4969
4970
4971
4972
4973
4974
4975
4976
4977
4978
4979
4980
4981
4982
4983
4984
4985
4986
4987
4988
4989
4990
4991
4992
4993
4994
4995
4996
4997
4998
4999
5000
5001
5002
5003
5004
5005
5006
5007
5008
5009
5010
5011
5012
5013
5014
5015
5016
5017
5018
5019
5020
5021
5022
5023
5024
5025
5026
5027
5028
5029
5030
5031
5032
5033
5034
5035
5036
5037
5038
5039
5040
5041
5042
5043
5044
5045
5046
5047
5048
5049
5050
5051
5052
5053
5054
5055
5056
5057
5058
5059
5060
5061
5062
5063
5064
5065
5066
5067
5068
5069
5070
5071
5072
5073
5074
5075
5076
5077
5078
5079
5080
5081
5082
5083
5084
5085
5086
5087
5088
5089
5090
5091
5092
5093
5094
5095
5096
5097
5098
5099
5100
5101
5102
5103
5104
5105
5106
5107
5108
5109
5110
5111
5112
5113
5114
5115
5116
5117
5118
5119
5120
5121
5122
5123
5124
5125
5126
5127
5128
5129
5130
5131
5132
5133
5134
5135
5136
5137
5138
5139
5140
5141
5142
5143
5144
5145
5146
5147
5148
5149
5150
5151
5152
5153
5154
5155
5156
5157
5158
5159
5160
5161
5162
5163
5164
5165
5166
5167
5168
5169
5170
5171
5172
5173
5174
5175
5176
5177
5178
5179
5180
5181
5182
5183
5184
5185
5186
5187
5188
5189
5190
5191
5192
5193
5194
5195
5196
5197
5198
5199
5200
5201
5202
5203
5204
5205
5206
5207
5208
5209
5210
5211
5212
5213
5214
5215
5216
5217
5218
5219
5220
5221
5222
5223
5224
5225
5226
5227
5228
5229
5230
5231
5232
5233
5234
5235
5236
5237
5238
5239
5240
5241
5242
5243
5244
5245
5246
5247
5248
5249
5250
5251
5252
5253
5254
5255
5256
5257
5258
5259
5260
5261
5262
5263
5264
5265
5266
5267
5268
5269
5270
5271
5272
5273
5274
5275
5276
5277
5278
5279
5280
5281
5282
5283
5284
5285
5286
5287
5288
5289
5290
5291
5292
5293
5294
5295
5296
5297
5298
5299
5300
5301
5302
5303
5304
5305
5306
5307
5308
5309
5310
5311
5312
5313
5314
5315
5316
5317
5318
5319
5320
5321
5322
5323
5324
5325
5326
5327
5328
5329
5330
5331
5332
5333
5334
5335
5336
5337
5338
5339
5340
5341
5342
5343
5344
5345
5346
5347
5348
5349
5350
5351
5352
5353
5354
5355
5356
5357
5358
5359
5360
5361
5362
5363
5364
5365
5366
5367
5368
5369
5370
5371
5372
5373
5374
5375
5376
5377
5378
5379
5380
5381
5382
5383
5384
5385
5386
5387
5388
5389
5390
5391
5392
5393
5394
5395
5396
5397
5398
5399
5400
5401
5402
5403
5404
5405
5406
5407
5408
5409
5410
5411
5412
5413
5414
5415
5416
5417
5418
5419
5420
5421
5422
5423
5424
5425
5426
5427
5428
5429
5430
5431
5432
5433
5434
5435
5436
5437
5438
5439
5440
5441
5442
5443
5444
5445
5446
5447
5448
5449
5450
5451
5452
5453
5454
5455
5456
5457
5458
5459
5460
5461
5462
5463
5464
5465
5466
5467
5468
5469
5470
5471
5472
5473
5474
5475
5476
5477
5478
5479
5480
5481
5482
5483
5484
5485
5486
5487
5488
5489
5490
5491
5492
5493
5494
5495
5496
5497
5498
5499
5500
5501
5502
5503
5504
5505
5506
5507
5508
5509
5510
5511
5512
5513
5514
5515
5516
5517
5518
5519
5520
5521
5522
5523
5524
5525
5526
5527
5528
5529
5530
5531
5532
5533
5534
5535
5536
5537
5538
5539
5540
5541
5542
5543
5544
5545
5546
5547
5548
5549
5550
5551
5552
5553
5554
5555
5556
5557
5558
5559
5560
5561
5562
5563
5564
5565
5566
5567
5568
5569
5570
5571
5572
5573
5574
5575
5576
5577
5578
5579
5580
5581
5582
5583
5584
5585
5586
5587
5588
5589
5590
5591
5592
5593
5594
5595
5596
5597
5598
5599
5600
5601
5602
5603
5604
5605
5606
5607
5608
5609
5610
5611
5612
5613
5614
5615
5616
5617
5618
5619
5620
5621
5622
5623
5624
5625
5626
5627
5628
5629
5630
5631
5632
5633
5634
5635
5636
5637
5638
5639
5640
5641
5642
5643
5644
5645
5646
5647
5648
5649
5650
5651
5652
5653
5654
5655
5656
5657
5658
5659
5660
5661
5662
5663
5664
5665
5666
5667
5668
5669
5670
5671
5672
5673
5674
5675
5676
5677
5678
5679
5680
5681
5682
5683
5684
5685
5686
5687
5688
5689
5690
5691
5692
5693
5694
5695
5696
5697
5698
5699
5700
5701
5702
5703
5704
5705
5706
5707
5708
5709
5710
5711
5712
5713
5714
5715
5716
5717
5718
5719
5720
5721
5722
5723
5724
5725
5726
5727
5728
5729
5730
5731
5732
5733
5734
5735
5736
5737
5738
5739
5740
5741
5742
5743
5744
5745
5746
5747
5748
5749
5750
5751
5752
5753
5754
5755
5756
5757
5758
5759
5760
5761
5762
5763
5764
5765
5766
5767
5768
5769
5770
5771
5772
5773
5774
5775
5776
5777
5778
5779
5780
5781
5782
5783
5784
5785
5786
5787
5788
5789
5790
5791
5792
5793
5794
5795
5796
5797
5798
5799
5800
5801
5802
5803
5804
5805
5806
5807
5808
5809
5810
5811
5812
5813
5814
5815
5816
5817
5818
5819
5820
5821
5822
5823
5824
5825
5826
5827
5828
5829
5830
5831
5832
5833
5834
5835
5836
5837
5838
5839
5840
5841
5842
5843
5844
5845
5846
5847
5848
5849
5850
5851
5852
5853
5854
5855
5856
5857
5858
5859
5860
5861
5862
5863
5864
5865
5866
5867
5868
5869
5870
5871
5872
5873
5874
5875
5876
5877
5878
5879
5880
5881
5882
5883
5884
5885
5886
5887
5888
5889
5890
5891
5892
5893
5894
5895
5896
5897
5898
5899
5900
5901
5902
5903
5904
5905
5906
5907
5908
5909
5910
5911
5912
5913
5914
5915
5916
5917
5918
5919
5920
5921
5922
5923
5924
5925
5926
5927
5928
5929
5930
5931
5932
5933
5934
5935
5936
5937
5938
5939
5940
5941
5942
5943
5944
5945
5946
5947
5948
5949
5950
5951
5952
5953
5954
5955
5956
5957
5958
5959
5960
5961
5962
5963
5964
5965
5966
5967
5968
5969
5970
5971
5972
5973
5974
5975
5976
5977
5978
5979
5980
5981
5982
5983
5984
5985
5986
5987
5988
5989
5990
5991
5992
5993
5994
5995
5996
5997
5998
5999
6000
6001
6002
6003
6004
6005
6006
6007
6008
6009
6010
6011
6012
6013
6014
6015
6016
6017
6018
6019
6020
6021
6022
6023
6024
6025
6026
6027
6028
6029
6030
6031
6032
6033
6034
6035
6036
6037
6038
6039
6040
6041
6042
6043
6044
6045
6046
6047
6048
6049
6050
6051
6052
6053
6054
6055
6056
6057
6058
6059
6060
6061
6062
6063
6064
6065
6066
6067
6068
6069
6070
6071
6072
6073
6074
6075
6076
6077
6078
6079
6080
6081
6082
6083
6084
6085
6086
6087
6088
6089
6090
6091
6092
6093
6094
6095
6096
6097
6098
6099
6100
6101
6102
6103
6104
6105
6106
6107
6108
6109
6110
6111
6112
6113
6114
6115
6116
6117
6118
6119
6120
6121
6122
6123
6124
6125
6126
6127
6128
6129
6130
6131
6132
6133
6134
6135
6136
6137
6138
6139
6140
6141
6142
6143
6144
6145
6146
6147
6148
6149
6150
6151
6152
6153
6154
6155
6156
6157
6158
6159
6160
6161
6162
6163
6164
6165
6166
6167
6168
6169
6170
6171
6172
6173
6174
6175
6176
6177
6178
6179
6180
6181
6182
6183
6184
6185
6186
6187
6188
6189
6190
6191
6192
6193
6194
6195
6196
6197
6198
6199
6200
6201
6202
6203
6204
6205
6206
6207
6208
6209
6210
6211
6212
6213
6214
6215
6216
6217
6218
6219
6220
6221
6222
6223
6224
6225
6226
6227
6228
6229
6230
6231
6232
6233
6234
6235
6236
6237
6238
6239
6240
6241
6242
6243
6244
6245
6246
6247
6248
6249
6250
6251
6252
6253
6254
6255
6256
6257
6258
6259
6260
6261
6262
6263
6264
6265
6266
6267
6268
6269
6270
6271
6272
6273
6274
6275
6276
6277
6278
6279
6280
6281
6282
6283
6284
6285
6286
6287
6288
6289
6290
6291
6292
6293
6294
6295
6296
6297
6298
6299
6300
6301
6302
6303
6304
6305
6306
6307
6308
6309
6310
6311
6312
6313
6314
6315
6316
6317
6318
6319
6320
6321
6322
6323
6324
6325
6326
6327
6328
6329
6330
6331
6332
6333
6334
6335
6336
6337
6338
6339
6340
6341
6342
6343
6344
6345
6346
6347
6348
6349
6350
6351
6352
6353
6354
6355
6356
6357
6358
6359
6360
6361
6362
6363
6364
6365
6366
6367
6368
6369
6370
6371
6372
6373
6374
6375
6376
6377
6378
6379
6380
6381
6382
6383
6384
6385
6386
6387
6388
6389
6390
6391
6392
6393
6394
6395
6396
6397
6398
6399
6400
6401
6402
6403
6404
6405
6406
6407
6408
6409
6410
6411
6412
6413
6414
6415
6416
6417
6418
6419
6420
6421
6422
6423
6424
6425
6426
6427
6428
6429
6430
6431
6432
6433
6434
6435
6436
6437
6438
6439
6440
6441
6442
6443
6444
6445
6446
6447
6448
6449
6450
6451
6452
6453
6454
6455
6456
6457
6458
6459
6460
6461
6462
6463
6464
6465
6466
6467
6468
6469
6470
6471
6472
6473
6474
6475
6476
6477
6478
6479
6480
6481
6482
6483
6484
6485
6486
6487
6488
6489
6490
6491
6492
6493
6494
6495
6496
6497
6498
6499
6500
6501
6502
6503
6504
6505
6506
6507
6508
6509
6510
6511
6512
6513
6514
6515
6516
6517
6518
6519
6520
6521
6522
6523
6524
6525
6526
6527
6528
6529
6530
6531
6532
6533
6534
6535
6536
6537
6538
6539
6540
6541
6542
6543
6544
6545
6546
6547
6548
6549
6550
6551
6552
6553
6554
6555
6556
6557
6558
6559
6560
6561
6562
6563
6564
6565
6566
6567
6568
6569
6570
6571
6572
6573
6574
6575
6576
6577
6578
6579
6580
6581
6582
6583
6584
6585
6586
6587
6588
6589
6590
6591
6592
6593
6594
6595
6596
6597
6598
6599
6600
6601
6602
6603
6604
6605
6606
6607
6608
6609
6610
6611
6612
6613
6614
6615
6616
6617
6618
6619
6620
6621
6622
6623
6624
6625
6626
6627
6628
6629
6630
6631
6632
6633
6634
6635
6636
6637
6638
6639
6640
6641
6642
6643
6644
6645
6646
6647
6648
6649
6650
6651
6652
6653
6654
6655
6656
6657
6658
6659
6660
6661
6662
6663
6664
6665
6666
6667
6668
6669
6670
6671
6672
6673
6674
6675
6676
6677
6678
6679
6680
6681
6682
6683
6684
6685
6686
6687
6688
6689
6690
6691
6692
6693
6694
6695
6696
6697
6698
6699
6700
6701
6702
6703
6704
6705
6706
6707
6708
6709
6710
6711
6712
6713
6714
6715
6716
6717
6718
6719
6720
6721
6722
6723
6724
6725
6726
6727
6728
6729
6730
6731
6732
6733
6734
6735
6736
6737
6738
6739
6740
6741
6742
6743
6744
6745
6746
6747
6748
6749
6750
6751
6752
6753
6754
6755
6756
6757
6758
6759
6760
6761
6762
6763
6764
6765
6766
6767
6768
6769
6770
6771
6772
6773
6774
6775
6776
6777
6778
6779
6780
6781
6782
6783
6784
6785
6786
6787
6788
6789
6790
6791
6792
6793
6794
6795
6796
6797
6798
6799
6800
6801
6802
6803
6804
6805
6806
6807
6808
6809
6810
6811
6812
6813
6814
6815
6816
6817
6818
6819
6820
6821
6822
6823
6824
6825
6826
6827
6828
6829
6830
6831
6832
6833
6834
6835
6836
6837
6838
6839
6840
6841
6842
6843
6844
6845
6846
6847
6848
6849
6850
6851
6852
6853
6854
6855
6856
6857
6858
6859
6860
6861
6862
6863
6864
6865
6866
6867
6868
6869
6870
6871
6872
6873
6874
6875
6876
6877
6878
6879
6880
6881
6882
6883
6884
6885
6886
6887
6888
6889
6890
6891
6892
6893
6894
6895
6896
6897
6898
6899
6900
6901
6902
6903
6904
6905
6906
6907
6908
6909
6910
6911
6912
6913
6914
6915
6916
6917
6918
6919
6920
6921
6922
6923
6924
6925
6926
6927
6928
6929
6930
6931
6932
6933
6934
6935
6936
6937
6938
6939
6940
6941
6942
6943
6944
6945
6946
6947
6948
6949
6950
6951
6952
6953
6954
6955
6956
6957
6958
6959
6960
6961
6962
6963
6964
6965
6966
6967
6968
6969
6970
6971
6972
6973
6974
6975
6976
6977
6978
6979
6980
6981
6982
6983
6984
6985
6986
6987
6988
6989
6990
6991
6992
6993
6994
6995
6996
6997
6998
6999
7000
7001
7002
7003
7004
7005
7006
7007
7008
7009
7010
7011
7012
7013
7014
7015
7016
7017
7018
7019
7020
7021
7022
7023
7024
7025
7026
7027
7028
7029
7030
7031
7032
7033
7034
7035
7036
7037
7038
7039
7040
7041
7042
7043
7044
7045
7046
7047
7048
7049
7050
7051
7052
7053
7054
7055
7056
7057
7058
7059
7060
7061
7062
7063
7064
7065
7066
7067
7068
7069
7070
7071
7072
7073
7074
7075
7076
7077
7078
7079
7080
7081
7082
7083
7084
7085
7086
7087
7088
7089
7090
7091
7092
7093
7094
7095
7096
7097
7098
7099
7100
7101
7102
7103
7104
7105
7106
7107
7108
7109
7110
7111
7112
7113
7114
7115
7116
7117
7118
7119
7120
7121
7122
7123
7124
7125
7126
7127
7128
7129
7130
7131
7132
7133
7134
7135
7136
7137
7138
7139
7140
7141
7142
7143
7144
7145
7146
7147
7148
7149
7150
7151
7152
7153
7154
7155
7156
7157
7158
7159
7160
7161
7162
7163
7164
7165
7166
7167
7168
7169
7170
7171
7172
7173
7174
7175
7176
7177
7178
7179
7180
7181
7182
7183
7184
7185
7186
7187
7188
7189
7190
7191
7192
7193
7194
7195
7196
7197
7198
7199
7200
7201
7202
7203
7204
7205
7206
7207
7208
7209
7210
7211
7212
7213
7214
7215
7216
7217
7218
7219
7220
7221
7222
7223
7224
7225
7226
7227
7228
7229
7230
7231
7232
7233
7234
7235
7236
7237
7238
7239
7240
7241
7242
7243
7244
7245
7246
7247
7248
7249
7250
7251
7252
7253
7254
7255
7256
7257
7258
7259
7260
7261
7262
7263
7264
7265
7266
7267
7268
7269
7270
7271
7272
7273
7274
7275
7276
7277
7278
7279
7280
7281
7282
7283
7284
7285
7286
7287
7288
7289
7290
7291
7292
7293
7294
7295
7296
7297
7298
7299
7300
7301
7302
7303
7304
7305
7306
7307
7308
7309
7310
7311
7312
7313
7314
7315
7316
7317
7318
7319
7320
7321
7322
7323
7324
7325
7326
7327
7328
7329
7330
7331
7332
7333
7334
7335
7336
7337
7338
7339
7340
7341
7342
7343
7344
7345
7346
7347
7348
7349
7350
7351
7352
7353
7354
7355
7356
7357
7358
7359
7360
7361
7362
7363
7364
7365
7366
7367
7368
7369
7370
7371
7372
7373
7374
7375
7376
7377
7378
7379
7380
7381
7382
7383
7384
7385
7386
7387
7388
7389
7390
7391
7392
7393
7394
7395
7396
7397
7398
7399
7400
7401
7402
7403
7404
7405
7406
7407
7408
7409
7410
7411
7412
7413
7414
7415
7416
7417
7418
7419
7420
7421
7422
7423
7424
7425
7426
7427
7428
7429
7430
7431
7432
7433
7434
7435
7436
7437
7438
7439
7440
7441
7442
7443
7444
7445
7446
7447
7448
7449
7450
7451
7452
7453
7454
7455
7456
7457
7458
7459
7460
7461
7462
7463
7464
7465
7466
7467
7468
7469
7470
7471
7472
7473
7474
7475
7476
7477
7478
7479
7480
7481
7482
7483
7484
7485
7486
7487
7488
7489
7490
7491
7492
7493
7494
7495
7496
7497
7498
7499
7500
7501
7502
7503
7504
7505
7506
7507
7508
7509
7510
7511
7512
7513
7514
7515
7516
7517
7518
7519
7520
7521
7522
7523
7524
7525
7526
7527
7528
7529
7530
7531
7532
7533
7534
7535
7536
7537
7538
7539
7540
7541
7542
7543
7544
7545
7546
7547
7548
7549
7550
7551
7552
7553
7554
7555
7556
7557
7558
7559
7560
7561
7562
7563
7564
7565
7566
7567
7568
7569
7570
7571
7572
7573
7574
7575
7576
7577
7578
7579
7580
7581
7582
7583
7584
7585
7586
7587
7588
7589
7590
7591
7592
7593
7594
7595
7596
7597
7598
7599
7600
7601
7602
7603
7604
7605
7606
7607
7608
7609
7610
7611
7612
7613
7614
7615
7616
7617
7618
7619
7620
7621
7622
7623
7624
7625
7626
7627
7628
7629
7630
7631
7632
7633
7634
7635
7636
7637
7638
7639
7640
7641
7642
7643
7644
7645
7646
7647
7648
7649
7650
7651
7652
7653
7654
7655
7656
7657
7658
7659
7660
7661
7662
7663
7664
7665
7666
7667
7668
7669
7670
7671
7672
7673
7674
7675
7676
7677
7678
7679
7680
7681
7682
7683
7684
7685
7686
7687
7688
7689
7690
7691
7692
7693
7694
7695
7696
7697
7698
7699
7700
7701
7702
7703
7704
7705
7706
7707
7708
7709
7710
7711
7712
7713
7714
7715
7716
7717
7718
7719
7720
7721
7722
7723
7724
7725
7726
7727
7728
7729
7730
7731
7732
7733
7734
7735
7736
7737
7738
7739
7740
7741
7742
7743
7744
7745
7746
7747
7748
7749
7750
7751
7752
7753
7754
7755
7756
7757
7758
7759
7760
7761
7762
7763
7764
7765
7766
7767
7768
7769
7770
7771
7772
7773
7774
7775
7776
7777
7778
7779
7780
7781
7782
7783
7784
7785
7786
7787
7788
7789
7790
7791
7792
7793
7794
7795
7796
7797
7798
7799
7800
7801
7802
7803
7804
7805
7806
7807
7808
7809
7810
7811
7812
7813
7814
7815
7816
7817
7818
7819
7820
7821
7822
7823
7824
7825
7826
7827
7828
7829
7830
7831
7832
7833
7834
7835
7836
7837
7838
7839
7840
7841
7842
7843
7844
7845
7846
7847
7848
7849
7850
7851
7852
7853
7854
7855
7856
7857
7858
7859
7860
7861
7862
7863
7864
7865
7866
7867
7868
7869
7870
7871
7872
7873
7874
7875
7876
7877
7878
7879
7880
7881
7882
7883
7884
7885
7886
7887
7888
7889
7890
7891
7892
7893
7894
7895
7896
7897
7898
7899
7900
7901
7902
7903
7904
7905
7906
7907
7908
7909
7910
7911
7912
7913
7914
7915
7916
7917
7918
7919
7920
7921
7922
7923
7924
7925
7926
7927
7928
7929
7930
7931
7932
7933
7934
7935
7936
7937
7938
7939
7940
7941
7942
7943
7944
7945
7946
7947
7948
7949
7950
7951
7952
7953
7954
7955
7956
7957
7958
7959
7960
7961
7962
7963
7964
7965
7966
7967
7968
7969
7970
7971
7972
7973
7974
7975
7976
7977
7978
7979
7980
7981
7982
The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Wonder Island Boys: Treasures of the
Island, by Roger Thompson Finlay


This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org





Title: The Wonder Island Boys: Treasures of the Island


Author: Roger Thompson Finlay



Release Date: June 11, 2007  [eBook #21810]

Language: English

Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII)


***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: TREASURES
OF THE ISLAND***


E-text prepared by Joe Longo and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed
Proofreading Team (https://www.pgdp.net)



Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this
      file which includes the original illustrations.
      See 21810-h.htm or 21810-h.zip:
      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/8/1/21810/21810-h/21810-h.htm)
      or
      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/8/1/21810/21810-h.zip)





THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS

by

ROGER T. FINLAY

A new series of books, each complete in itself, relating the remarkable
experiences of two boys and a man, who are cast upon an island in the
South Seas with absolutely nothing but the clothing they wore. By the
exercise of their ingenuity they succeed in fashioning clothing, tools
and weapons and not only do they train nature's forces to work for them
but they subdue and finally civilize neighboring savage tribes. The
books contain two thousand items of interest that every boy ought to
know.

              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
                  The Castaways

              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
               Exploring the Island

              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
            The Mysteries of the Caverns

              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
                  The Tribesmen

              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
              The Capture and Pursuit

              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
            The Conquest of the Savages

              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
          Adventures on Strange Islands

              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
             Treasures of the Islands

        _Large 12mo, cloth. Many illustrations.
             60 cents per vol., postpaid._

                    PUBLISHED BY
             THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
          147 FOURTH AVENUE    NEW YORK


       *       *       *       *       *


TREASURES OF THE ISLANDS

[Illustration: "_The scout from the rear now came in with a leap_"
[See p. 27]]




THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS

TREASURES OF THE ISLANDS

by

ROGER T. FINLAY

Illustrated







[Illustration]


The New York Book Company
New York
Copyright, 1915, by
The New York Book Company




CONTENTS


CHAPTER

I. THE PECULIAR SIGNALS                         Page 15

     The doleful sound. The Alma Perdita. "Cry of the Lost
     Soul." John, Uraso and Muro listening to the signals of
     the enemies. The night watch. Stalking. The answering
     cry. The Konotos. Sacrificial feasts. The dark of the
     moon. Its significance. The language of birds and
     animals. Their meaning. Discovery of cannibals. The
     telltale bone. Evidence of more than one tribe. Strange
     customs. Sacrifices of ancient times. Mexican rites.
     Superstitions. Previous history of the boys. Varney,
     Uraso and Muro. The Professor. The wreck and adventures.
     John's search for records, and inscriptions. Mysterious
     happenings. Waiting for morning. The plan outlined. The
     days of the sacrifices. Determine to prevent the killing
     of captives. Discovery of the natives in vicinity.
     Investigating the hills.

II. THE SAVAGES ON THE HILL                     Page 26

     John's instructions. John and Muro scouting. The natives
     intercepting Uraso. Preparing to resist the attack. The
     signaling instrument. A shot. A hurried report from the
     scout. Sending a messenger to Muro. The puzzled natives.
     Muro attacked. Marching east. Muro in danger. Making a
     demonstration. The weird drums. The ambush. The approach
     of the natives. The attempt to be friendly. The Chief's
     refusal. The appearance of Uraso. Uraso's ruse. The
     savages confounded. Muro surrounded. His escape. The
     savages retreating. Muro's story. Muro's efforts to make
     friends of the natives. Driving them from the woods. The
     sea of the east. The runner to the landing. The peculiar
     drums. The Marimba. The mountain deer.

III. CAPTURE OF THE VILLAGE                     Page 38

     The trying time at night. No selfishness in education.
     The evening talks. Astronomy and early humanity. Savage
     rites determined and carried out by the signs of the
     stars. The Zodiac. Its origin. The universal
     superstitions. A common origin. The continents. The
     theory of a mid-Atlantean continent. The theory of the
     joined continents. Language as a criterion of the unity
     of the races. The pyramids. The tales of the Egyptian
     priests. The deep sea soundings by the ship _Challenger_.
     The beating of the weird drums in the night. Evidence of
     the natives' belief in witch doctors. The plan of advance
     outlined by John. The boys, accompanied by John and
     portion of the force advancing. Nearing the village.
     Hearing the shouting and the drums. Causes of the
     demonstrations. A captive. At the edge of the village. A
     curious proceeding. A huge Chief. The witch doctors.
     Their fantastic garb. The Chief's defiance. Demands
     return of the captured Chief. Asks John to surrender.
     Commands the Korinos to destroy captive. They bring
     forward Tarra, their own messenger. The warning. The
     shot.

IV. RESCUING A WHITE CAPTIVE                    Page 53

     Tarra freed. When captured. The fallen witch doctor. The
     surprise. The warning from Uraso. Exorcising the bad
     spirits. The influence of noise on savage minds. The gun
     silencers. The savages insist on aiding their fallen
     witch doctor. The shot with the silencer. The awe
     produced. John the white Korino. The terror among the
     natives. The Chief retreats. Entering the village. The
     Chief and people flee. The reserves come up. The sick and
     wounded in the village. A prison stockade. Rescuing
     prisoners. Their terrible plight. A white captive. The
     stockade burned. Learning about the tribes on the island.
     The messenger to the Chief. The latter's message. John's
     bold march to see the Chief. Astounded at John's bravery.
     John's peace pact with the Chief. The return to the
     village. The Chief assured of the friendship of John and
     his people. Learning about the other tribe. One sun to
     the north. The Chief told why the white Chief was so
     powerful. Wisdom. John's practical example to the Chief.

V. RETURN OF THE NATIVES                        Page 66

     Trinkets. Adornments for the natives. Gifts. The day
     appointed for the sacrifices. John and party invited by
     the Chief. John sends for the gifts. The _Pioneer_ at the
     landing. Sails to the native village. The Korinos called
     before the Chief. He demands that they produce the
     captives for sacrifice. The Korinos learn of the
     destruction of the stockade, and the release of the
     captives. The Chief condemns the Korinos to take their
     places. John secures delay. At the beach. The natives
     gathering clams for the feast. The Korinos and their
     caves. A sail. The boys spread the news. The signal. The
     natives wonder at the sight of the vessel. The _Pioneer_.
     The feast that night. Spitting meat. The natives'
     customs. Vegetables. The drink. Arialad. The value of the
     root. Ginseng.

VI. THE SAVAGE CEREMONIALS                      Page 78

     The day for the ceremonies. The native cloth weaving.
     Dyeing. Black and red. The grotesque figures. The spears.
     The colored streamers. The covered points. The flag idea.
     A brilliant scheme by the boys. The band for the
     ceremonies. A procession. The ship's band. The leader.
     The enthusiasm in the village. The dancing natives.
     Arranging the order of the procession. The tall man and
     huge spear. The Korinos. The band and the flag at the
     procession. The leader. The magnolia trees. The march to
     the forest. The great tree on the hill. The ceremony.
     Striking the tree. The flower at the top. How it was
     brought down. The rite of the flower. Incineration. The
     powder. The dance. Return of the procession.

VII. SIGNIFICANCE OF NATIVE RITES               Page 88

     Fasting before the feast. Great success of the ceremony.
     The significance of the flower rites. Ancient origin of
     rites. Explaining customs which followed the practice of
     scalping. Head hunters. The hair token. The flower before
     the fruit. The Druids. The ceremonia of the mistletoe.
     The antidote. The oak as a sacred tree. The great feast
     after the ceremony. Table implements. The Korinos. Where
     they were imprisoned. Prepared for the sacrifice. Their
     attempted escape. Gluttony. Habits of savages in this
     respect. The siesta. The boys discover the escape of the
     Korinos. The Marmozets. The tall native with the knotted
     club. His remarkable garb. The Chief's crown. The
     club-bearer reports the escape of the Korinos. The
     Chief's anger. Arrests the guards. Condemns them to
     suffer instead of the Korinos. The procession to the
     place of sacrifice. The sacrificial altar.

VIII. HYPNOTISM ON SAVAGES                      Page 100

     John's suggestion to the Chief. Asks that he be made the
     executioner. Uraso's address to the culprits. Their
     terror. Mysticism. Hypnotic influences. Mesmerism.
     Constant repetitions. Mystic numbers. The spell on all
     the natives. The effect of the mesmeric influence on the
     Chief. The rigid subjects. John the peerless Korino. The
     threats against the witch doctors. Bringing the victims
     to life. Amazement of the people. The Chief's address to
     his people. The return to the village. The feast. The
     mystic third. The dance at the end of the festival. To
     settle the fate of the Korinos. The recovery of the
     faculties of the white captive. His story. The identity
     of the skeleton found on Venture Island. Identified with
     Walter. The story which was doubted by John. The rescued
     natives. The Maloses. Ta Babeda. The tribe to the north.
     Distributing the gifts. The delight of the Chief. Telling
     him about the wonders of Wonder Island. The invitation to
     the Chief.

IX. THE REMARKABLE CAVE EXPLORATIONS            Page 113

     The Umbolos, to the north. The supposed cannibals.
     Determine to visit them. Preparing for the expedition.
     Chief Ta Babeda cautions John against the cannibal Chief
     Rumisses. John requests permission to take the Korinos
     with him. He consents provided John will enter the cave
     and take them. The trip to the cave. The Chief
     accompanies John to the cave. Superstitions about the
     caves. Why no one but the Korinos dare enter the caves.
     The hill near the ocean. The cove near the entrance of
     the cave. The flashlights. Lighting the caverns.
     Evidences of habitations. The escape of the Korinos.
     Following the trail. The outlet to the south. Tracked to
     the north. Uraso and Muro follow the fugitives. Their
     flight to the cannibal tribe. John and the boys return to
     explore the cave. A new series of caverns. A succession
     of four chambers. A large round chamber at the end of the
     lead. A mound in the center of the chamber. Removing the
     material in the mound. Discovery of the copper box.
     Peculiar character of the box.

X. THE TRIBE TO THE NORTH                       Page 125

     The copper box taken to the ship. News from Uraso and
     Muro. Explaining mesmerism and hypnotism. Concentration.
     The effect on susceptible minds. The Korinos safe with
     the cannibal tribe. John advises Stut to sail, north for
     twenty miles, and await their coming. The march. The
     cinnamon tree. Cinnamon suet. Minerals. Sulphates. Copper
     ores. Omens. All peoples believe in signs and omens. The
     shelter for the night. How signals were made. Sighting
     the cannibal village. Earthenware cooking utensils. Meet
     the first natives. The dreaded Chief. A curious figure.
     The hunchback. A smile on his face. The American
     greeting. The surprise. A white man. Finding the Korinos.
     The welcome to his village. The Chief told about their
     ship. On the island fifty years. Telling John about the
     strange things which have floated ashore from wrecked
     ships. The Korinos assured of safety.

XI. THE HUNCHBACK CHIEF                         Page 138

     The Chief's house. The relics from the sea. The hunchback
     Chief's story. His trip as a whaler. Ill treatment. Runs
     away. Ships to China. His rudimentary education.
     Shipwrecked on the return from China. Rescued by native
     cannibals. Regard him with veneration. Misinterprets
     their motives. In desperation. Asserts himself. Becomes
     Chief of the tribe. Stops cannibal practices. His great
     influence over the people. The _Pioneer_ arrives. Ephraim
     Wilmar, the hunchback. His surprise at the many changes
     during fifty years. His amazement at the telephone, the
     cable lines, the phonograph.

XII. THE CHIEF'S FAMILY                         Page 148

     Ephraim's wife. The family. The gifts to Ephraim's
     family. Delight at the cooking utensils. John tells
     Ephraim about the treasures on the islands. Hidden
     treasures. Learning the secrets of early humanity.
     Archeology. The trip to the cave. The long journey. The
     cave which had the entrances sealed by Ephraim. The
     peculiar kinds of masonry. Entering the cave. Dogs with
     the party. Mysterious death of the dogs. The alarm of the
     natives. Carbonic gas. Its nature, and how tested.
     Methods for removing it. The Humphrey Davy lamp. The
     principle on which it is made. Designed to indicate the
     presence of deadly gases. Explosive mixtures. How a
     primitive safety lamp was made. Reentering the cave. A
     large chamber. The cross-shaped cave. A parchment. The
     object of John's search.

XIII. THE CHART AND THE CAVES                   Page 164

     The map accompanying the parchment. One of the Treasure
     caves. Remarkable carvings, and hieroglyphics. The
     quarrel of the buccaneers. The story of the Spaniard who
     wrote the chart. The expeditions searching for the
     treasure. Death of all who participated. Great
     archeological wealth. No material treasures found. How
     Ephraim's story affected the boys. John explains why the
     cannibals feared him. Due to their superstitions.
     Demented people regarded by some as saints. Genius and
     insanity. Further explorations of the island. The
     proposed trip to Wonder Island. Ephraim invited. He and
     his family accept. Telling Ephraim about Hutoton. The
     curious tales that were told them about the convict
     colony. The wonderful character of the people at Hutoton.
     The _Pioneer_ sails. The first time on the deck of a
     vessel for fifty-two years. Ephraim and the library. His
     conversation with the head of the convict colony. The
     identity of the paralyzed man not established.

XIV. RESCUE ISLAND                              Page 175

     The visitors at Hutoton received with rejoicing. John
     invites the leader to accompany them to Wonder Island.
     Retlaw, the captive, rescued, brought ashore. Caramo
     thought he recognized him. Sailing of the _Pioneer_ for
     Wonder Island. Calling at the Malolo village. Ta Babeda
     agrees to accompany them to Wonder Island. Naming the
     island Rescue. The latitude and longitude noted.
     Introducing Ta Babeda to the cannibal Chief Ephraim. He
     explains how the Korinos misrepresented him and his
     people. The new world to Babeda when he stepped on board
     the _Pioneer_. The trip to Wonder Island. The mysteries
     on board the ship to the Chief. His inquisitive nature.
     How he characterized electricity. Ephraim's concern for
     his children. Approaching Enterprise River. The steamship
     _Wonder_ in sight. The greeting. Going up the river. The
     excitement in Unity. The crowded dock. Sutoto and his
     bride. The flag on the _Wonder_. The curiosity of
     Beralsea at the sight of the Banners.

XV. THE RETURN TO WONDER ISLAND                 Page 187

     Sutoto and the great wide world. Their trip to
     Valparaiso. Cinda, and the latest fashions. Blakely, the
     man of business. The boys tell him of the wonderful
     islands. His eagerness. He tells them of the great
     enterprises, and of the prospective new ship. The growth
     of Unity. The tribesmen coming in. Introducing Blakely to
     the Chiefs. They marvel at his energy. The Professor.
     John tells him about the copper box. The new hotel. The
     wonderful work in Unity. Agricultural pursuits. What they
     shipped to the north. The plans for surveying the
     islands. How the lands were apportioned. Building homes
     on the island. Energy of the natives. Emigration pouring
     in. Farm implements. Coffee tree planting. Raising cocoa.
     The schools. The Korinos as teachers. Explaining the
     trade problems to the Chief. Ephraim's desire to have his
     children remain and attend school. The Chief also permits
     his children to remain. Information that the paralyzed
     man is getting well. What paralysis is. The triangle. The
     visit of the boys to Sutoto's home. The new automobile.
     The surprise for the boys.

XVI. THE SAVAGES AT UNITY                       Page 199

     Their new machines. Blakely's treat for the boys. The
     Professor's car. John in his runabout. The automobile
     procession. The Chief and the automobile. The cottage for
     the Chief's family. The boys and the Professor review
     their work. The great pleasure in their enterprises.
     George and Harry selected to manage affairs on Venture
     and Rescue Islands. The copper box. The skull in the
     package. The Professor announces the return of the reason
     of the paralytic. The word "triangle" announced by the
     paralytic. The remarkable coincidence. Opening the copper
     box. The triangle on the Walter letter. The skull within
     the copper box. The cryptic signs in the box. The
     counterpart of the skull they had found. The identical
     inscription. The agitation of the paralytic at the sight.
     He mentions the name of Walter. Retlaw enters and starts
     at the sight of the skulls. Tries to escape on seeing the
     paralytic. The latter announces his name as Clifford.
     Harry rightly judges that _Retlaw_ is _Walter_ reversed.
     Ephraim recognizes Clifford. Walter arrested.

XVII. UNRAVELING THE MYSTERIES                  Page 214

     Speculations concerning Walter. Sutoto informed. The
     mystery of their missing boat. Clifford's story. The
     paper with the markings on the skull identified by Ta
     Babeda. The secret in possession of Walter. The boys'
     suggestion as to proper names for the natives. Surnames,
     and how originated. The method adopted by the Romans. The
     Greek names. English surnames. Clifford's condition
     improving. Trying to identify the skeleton found on
     Venture Island. Clifford recognizes Ephraim. Walter's
     letter. The three islands. The triangle. The three
     southern stars. The southern cross. The three crosses.
     Thirty leagues. The charts of the islands.

XVIII. THE STORY OF THE LETTERED SKULL          Page 224

     Clifford awakes. The escape of Walter and his recapture.
     Clifford continues his story. His effort to find the
     treasure island. His meeting with Walter. Capture by the
     savages. The _Juan Ferde_. Blakely and Clifford. His
     knowledge of the skull. The finding of the boys' boat.
     Sailing down the river. Loss of the boat. Finding his
     companions. Sailing to Venture Island. His illness.
     Meeting with Walter on Rescue Island. His belief that
     Walter had hidden the chart. Walter brought in. Clifford
     apologizes to Walter. The Sign of the Plus and V. The
     chambers in the cave. What the inscriptions meant.
     Surprise when Walter learns of the finding of the copper
     box. Explains the meaning of the charts. Why there were
     three skulls. The mysterious letter. The remarkable
     happenings explained.




LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

  The scout from the rear now came in with a leap        Frontispiece
                                                                 PAGE
  'Stop!' cried John, 'It will be death for any one to touch him'  59
  'It is copper,' said John                                       138
  The old man pointed to the rocky wall                           154

  Fig.  1. The Marimba.                                            36
  Fig.  2. The Atlantean Plateau.                                  42
  Fig.  3. The Severed Hemispheres.                                45
  Fig.  4. Silencer: Convolute Blades.                             54
  Fig.  5. Spitting the Roast.                                     75
  Fig.  6. Arialad Fruit. Sarsaparilla.                            76
  Fig.  7. The Mistletoe.                                          90
  Fig.  8. The Jacchus.                                            95
  Fig.  9. The Cave on Rescue Island.                             119
  Fig. 10. Cinnamon.                                              129
  Fig. 11. Phonograph Disk.                                       146
  Fig. 12. Types of Masonry.                                      154
  Fig. 13. Types of Safety Lamps.                                 159
  Fig. 14. How John made the Lamp.                                160




TREASURES OF THE ISLANDS




CHAPTER I

THE PECULIAR SIGNALS


"Do you remember, Harry, after discovering the treasure and the
skeletons of the pirates in the cave near the Cataract, that we heard
the doleful sound of some bird while going down the hill?"

"Yes; that cry was something like it. Do you recall the name of the
bird, George?"

"It was the Alma Perdita."

"I remember, now; it means the 'Cry of the Lost Soul.'"

"Yes; but I don't think that came from a bird. It is more like an animal
of some kind. Don't you hear a sound that seems to be answering it?"

"It does seem so; I think John would know what animal it is; but it is
too late to speak to him about it to-night, George."

As Harry ceased speaking, the boys heard a noise, and George arose
holding up his hand as a warning. "I think I see something, so we ought
to call John."

The boys quietly moved forward, and noted two figures moving about a
short distance beyond. The boys crawled over to the place where John was
sleeping, and found that the place he occupied, as well as that of
Uraso's vacant.

"That must be John and Uraso over there," remarked Harry in a whisper.

They were confirmed in this on approaching the moving figures, and saw
that both were armed, and also that they were watching another moving
figure beyond.

"Is that a bird or an animal?" asked George.

"An animal," replied John, in an undertone.

"That was my opinion from the first," remarked George, who turned to
Harry with a sort of 'I told you so,' expression.

"But it is a two-legged animal," responded John.

"How long have you been up?" asked Harry.

"More than an hour," said Uraso. "Muro is now coming back, and we shall
know something more definite."

"Then that is Muro?" asked George, in surprise.

"Yes; he has been stalking the ones making that noise, and was the one
who called our attention to it."

Muro disappeared, and the peculiar cries were repeated, then, most
startlingly, a sound, similar in character, appeared to come from a
point very close to where they were now crouching.

John turned to Uraso in astonishment. The latter did not seem at all
perturbed, but after the second cry Uraso imitated the sound, and John
smiled.

"Muro has the exact tone now," said John.

"Yes," replied Uraso, "and the cry I gave was an answer, which Uraso
understands."

In a few minutes Muro appeared, but he was not smiling. His face was
grave, as he said: "We have come upon the terrible Konotos. I feared
that when I heard the first cry several hours ago."

"Have you been near them?" asked John.

"Near enough to know that there are quite a number, and what is more,
they are now engaged in their regular feast, and if they have any
captives, this is the time that they will be sacrificed," said Muro.

"Why do you think this is the time for that?" asked Harry.

"Because it was now nearing the _dark of the moon_, as you call it, and
that time is chosen because the Great Spirit, out of anger, is hiding
the light."

The boys now understood that this was a rite practiced by some of the
tribes on Wonder Island, during that season of the Moon's phase.

"Did you talk with them in that strange language?" asked Harry.

"No; but I tried to find out the key to the language they used."

"Is that their regular language?"

"Oh, no! That is simply the special language which they use on certain
occasions," answered Muro.

"The savages here, as everywhere, have a sort of code language, or a
species of wireless telegraphy, used by them only when in the presence
of enemies," commented John.

"Harry and I thought it might be the Alma Perdita, that we heard at the
cave near Cataract."

"No; but it shows the ingenuity of the savages, when I explain that
their most favored method is to assume the cry of some bird or animal,
and in so doing make it difficult for the enemy to distinguish the
assumed from the real."

"But on Wonder Island we had several methods of talking to each other,"
remarked Uraso. "For instance, we would perfectly imitate the cries of a
number of birds, and also of certain animals, and of the wood insects.
Thus, a nightingale would mean _watchfulness_; the chirrup of a cricket
would be the signal that the enemy was not dangerous, or that there were
not many of them; the cry of the Lost Soul bird would indicate that
there was great danger, and so on with the birds and animals that make
noises."

"But I have discovered another thing," remarked Muro.

"And what is that?" said John.

"The natives here are cannibals."

"That merely confirms my knowledge of the matter," said John.

The boys looked at John in amazement. How did John know there were
cannibals on the island?

"When did you learn that?" asked Harry.

"Yesterday," was his reply.

"What did you find that makes you believe that?"

"I discovered a bone which was once part of a human body."

"But how would that be any indication that the people here are
cannibals?"

"When you see a bone that has on it the unmistakable markings of human
teeth, it is pretty safe to infer that the animal which scratched the
bone was a cannibal."

From the report of Muro it was evident that there was a large number of
people on the island, and, if Muro's observations were correct, they now
had some captives, or, at least, were preparing to celebrate a feast in
which human beings were to be the victims.

"That satisfies me of one thing," said Harry.

"And what is that?" asked John.

"Why, that there must be other tribes on the island," he answered.

"Why do you infer that?"

"Well, where would they get the victims?"

"From their own people," answered John.

"What! eat their own people?" asked George.

"That is not at all strange. Many people are known to sacrifice their
own, and among the most degraded, they are known to kill and eat their
own."

"That is the first time I have heard of such a thing."

"Don't you remember that the Bible tells about Abraham about to offer up
his own son as a sacrifice?"

"Yes; but not to eat him."

"Of course not; but it is not an uncommon thing for tribes in Africa to
sell their own children for this purpose. One of the greatest
sacrificial rites of the ancient Mexicans, was to offer up the most
handsome youth each year, as a propitiation to the gods."

"So they do not always depend on their enemies to furnish the feast?"

"By no means. Many of the tribes have a superstition that if they eat a
brave enemy it will impart to them his spirit of valor, and the fact
that they are to have sacrifices here does not mean that there are
various tribes on the island; but that is something we shall have to
investigate. It is my opinion that we shall find other tribes, but that,
I am inclined to think, depends upon the size of the island."

       *       *       *       *       *

The preceding volume, "Adventures Among Strange Islands," states the
conditions under which the two boys, Harry and George, found themselves
on a strange island, in the southern Pacific. Accompanying them were
John L. Varney, and about sixty natives from Wonder Island, together
with the two Chiefs Uraso and Muro.

Nearly three years previously the boys, George Mayfield and Harry
Crandall, who were members of the crew of a school-ship, the
_Investigator_ sailed from New York, and while on board, met a
professor, who, when the ship was blown up at sea, became their
companion in the life boat in which they sought refuge. Together they
finally were stranded upon an unknown island, less than a hundred miles
from the island which was the scene of the adventures with which we are
now concerned.

On this island they discovered five or six savage tribes, from some of
which they rescued seven of their former boy companions. Here also they
met Mr. Varney, who had escaped from the savages. The Professor
succeeded in reconciling all the warring tribes, and the natives were
now engaged in agriculture, and in various other pursuits, and the boys
had the great pleasure and satisfaction of being able to build their own
vessel and return home. The trip to the Wonderful island, with which
this volume deals, was for a double purpose, as will presently be
shown.

John, as Mr. Varney was familiarly known to them, was not only a well
educated man, but a great adventurer, and had traveled all over the
world in pursuit of scientific knowledge. He was particularly interested
in the history of the men who first went to the western world, and
scattered civilization to the benighted countries.

Like many men of his character, he did not consider the question of
money. He tried to acquire knowledge and information for the love of the
quest, and in order to be of service to his fellow man, so it was purely
by accident that he became a member of a crew that sailed for the
southern seas at the same time that the boys left New York on their
trip.

While his companions undertook the mission solely for the sake of the
money which might be acquired, John engaged thinking it might offer the
means of laying bare many of the early legends and vague historical
accounts with which that region of the South Seas abounds, and he knew
that if any records were in existence, they could be preserved only in
such secure places as caverns, which the Spanish buccaneers invariably
selected as the safest places to conceal their treasures.

While the boys, together with the Professor and John, had found a vast
amount of treasure, as stated in the first six volumes containing the
history of Wonder Island, they found not a single scrap of historical
value, excepting a few traces, which have been referred to, and certain
inscriptions which all pointed to the same depositary, somewhere in the
South Seas.

The last inscription was found by John, shortly before they left Wonder
Island, and which, though its full meaning was wrapt in mystery,
pointed, as did the others, to another island than the one on which it
was found. What made the matter still more interesting, was the
knowledge that some one, by the name of Walters, either had prepared the
inscription, or had some knowledge of what it meant.

This man was not known to any of the party, and what made it the more
remarkable was the information, lately obtained, that while Walters,
apparently, knew one of the companions who accompanied John on his
wrecked vessel, that man did not know Walters, at least not by that
name.

These circumstances, together with numerous other incidents, which the
boys could not understand, or unravel, made such an impression on them,
that they were determined to devote their energies to ferret out the
inexplicable things, and the earnestness of John was a great incentive
in the undertaking.

Up to this time the boys did not know the real motive in the mind of
John. To them this quest on his part was to find out where the Treasure
islands were for the material value that might be obtained.

His long silence about the real design had been purposely concealed by
him, as he felt that merely to delve into the hidden recesses of the
islands would not be understood by them in its real sense, because as
boys they could not appreciate that real knowledge always must be
disassociated from the idea of material or commercial gain.

It was with a great deal of anxiety that the boys waited for the morning
sun. They had but a comparatively small force to deal with the
situation. True, they were equipped with fire-arms, and they knew that
the _Pioneer_, their vessel, would return within a week, still, within
that time the large number of natives might be able to surround them,
and unless they could get some word to the ship, and by that means
enable their friends to send reinforcements, they would be starved out.

As soon as the camp was astir there was a consultation. John had fully
matured a plan in his mind, but it was always a pleasure, as it had been
with the Professor, to present any complications to the boys, so that
they could take a hand in the developments which might follow.

"Harry and I have been considering the matter," said George. "We think
it would be well to leave this place, and go back to the landing and
wait for the _Pioneer_. We will then be ready, with reinforcements to
meet them with more than an even chance."

"But," remarked John; "are you willing to go back, and permit the devils
here to destroy the captives they may have, or, to prevent them from
sacrificing their own people?"

The boys had not thought of this. "I know the feast days, during which
these events will take place, will occur within the next four days,"
added Muro.

"If that is so," said Harry, "I am willing to do my share in keeping
them from it. What do you suggest?"

"We must try to get into communication with them, and if we fail then I
am in favor of taking some stringent measures to divert them from their
purpose," answered John.

"Then you may be assured we are with you to the end," said George.

"After talking with Uraso and Muro, we have agreed on a plan that may be
successful, and it will at any rate, for the time, prevent them from
carrying out their festival scheme." As John said this Muro appeared,
and stated that he had discovered the arrival of at least a hundred
natives on the hill beyond the second ravine, and that he saw smoke on
the third hill beyond that, and was of the opinion that the village must
not be far away.

This intelligence added interest to the situation. As nearly as could be
estimated they were at least fifteen miles from the landing place
selected when the _Pioneer_ sailed.

"Unless I am very much mistaken the ridge on which we now are is the
backbone of the island, and I also believe that it is narrow and we
should be able to find the sea much nearer by going east from this
place," remarked John.

"But if we do that it will be necessary for some one to go to the place
selected for the landing of the _Pioneer_, and tell them of our plans,
and what we have learned," said Harry.

"That is what I have in mind. But before doing that we must investigate
this portion of the island more carefully. My plan is as follows: Along
this ridge, further to the east, is a sheltered spot, or a place where
the rocks form a sort of cove, and which can be easily defended. If the
natives have not reached that quarter it will make an ideal retreat for
us, and where we can defend ourselves for an indefinite time."

"But why should we take up time to find a place like that if you intend
to take steps toward meeting the natives?"

"It will be used to fall back upon."

"Oh, then you intend to take measures against them at once?"

"Not for the first day, at least. As soon as we are established there we
will investigate the region to the east, and if we find the shore line
closer on the eastern shore, we can then send a runner with a message to
the landing place, giving them the information."

The boys now understood. It was evident that it would have been bad
policy to retreat in face of the enemy, if such he should prove to be.
Something must be done to divert the natives for the time being. This
would give them time to communicate with their vessel.

"There is one thing that must be remembered. The savages know of our
presence here. They are now on the alert, and we are being watched with
the greatest vigilance. If they think there is an opportunity for fresh
victims it will stimulate them to the greatest exertions."

"I agree with you in that view," said Uraso, as John finished speaking.




CHAPTER II

THE SAVAGES ON THE HILL


After a hurried breakfast the party marched along the southern crest of
the hill, keeping as much out of view of the watchers on the northern
side as possible. The course adopted was one well calculated to deceive
the natives, for while the main bulk of the party silently left the
camping place, a half dozen of their companions were left behind, and
they were particular to remain exposed at intervals, so that the
departure of the main party would not be discovered.

To those left behind, John said: "Remain here until you hear firing. In
that event you will know that we have met them, and that fact will be
sufficient notice that your duty here is at an end. Uraso has begged the
privilege of being with you, and you know that is an assurance of your
safety in any event."

The place suggested by John was not over two miles distant. Muro went
ahead with one of the most reliable men of his tribe, and at intervals
this runner was sent back with the information that the course was
clear.

Everything pointed to the success of the scheme, until they were within
sight of the place, when the runner came back hurriedly with the
information that Muro had seen the first of the natives, and he felt
certain that they were at the place selected for their fort.

The party halted. The runner returned, and John sent back a messenger to
Uraso, advising him to come forward at once. Within fifteen minutes the
messenger returned with the startling information that the natives were
between them and Uraso.

This was, indeed, surprising. Either they were experts at stalking
enemies, or they had been fortunate enough to bring up a force in such a
position as to make Uraso's escape a most hazardous one.

"We must make the best of the situation," said John. "Let us prepare to
receive them, if they are determined to attack us."

"But what shall we do about Uraso?" asked Harry, in some consternation.

"I think Uraso knows how to take care of the situation. He is shrewd
enough to outwit them, and if there is any danger from that quarter, he
will let us know."

"But how can he let us know if his messenger cannot get through?"

John smiled, as he looked at George, and responded: "You have evidently
forgotten that Uraso has the best signaling instrument in the world, the
gun."

"Certainly; I had forgotten that. But what shall we do if--" His voice
was cut short by a shot from the direction of Uraso's position.

"There it is," said Harry. "Two more shots!"

The scout from the rear now came in on a leap. "They are coming this
way," he hurriedly informed John.

"Who are coming?" asked John.

"The natives."

"Lie down!" he commanded. "No one must fire until I give the command.
Oto, go to Muro at once, and tell him to come back immediately."

In the distance to the west could be seen little squads of natives
coming directly toward them. In the different groups were fully fifteen
men, all armed with spears and bows and arrows.

"Uraso is driving them this way; I am sure of that," remarked John, as
he watched their maneuvers.

"What makes you think so?" asked George.

"They are simply retreating, thinking, in all probability that they have
met our entire band. They do not know we are here."

"Brave Uraso! I hope he will not get into danger," said George. "There
they are now; see them on the ridge to--"

A shot from the direction of Muro now awoke them to action. The moment
that sound reached the oncoming savages, they halted, and huddled
together, evidently in confusion at the meaning of the new alarm.

"Ah! they are puzzled!" Then, after a pause, he continued: "I hope Muro
is not in trouble! I do not understand why his messenger has not
returned."

Within ten minutes of the report of the gun which has just been referred
to, the messenger sent by John, came in and stated that it was
impossible for him to reach Muro, as the hill directly to the east was
alive with warriors.

It was now Muro's turn to get the sympathy of the boys, and both of them
turned to John, who still seemed unperturbed.

"We will march directly to the east," he announced. "Every man must hold
his gun ready for instant firing. Move forward quietly, as you have been
doing. We must go to the assistance of Muro. Uraso will take care of the
rear."

They glided along the crest, directly behind John, and as they passed
over the hill, it was evident that the natives were out in force.

"I wonder whether they have captured Muro?" asked Harry.

"No; he is all right. You may depend on it that he will not be taken
without a warning shot is given."

"But we heard a shot."

"True; but that was the messenger."

From the manner in which the natives in their front were scurrying to
and fro, it was apparent to John's practiced mind, they had no idea of
the approach of John and his party. It was plain that they knew of Muro,
or, at least of some one beyond the second hill, where John inferred
Muro must have gone, because all their energies appeared to be directed
toward that point.

"I am afraid they are after Muro, but I am sure if he finds himself in
danger he will fire a shot to warn us. In such a situation we must
attract their attention. I will detail the first squad to accompany me.
All those remaining will conceal themselves, and under no circumstances
show yourselves, or let your presence be known, unless you are attacked.
We will go to the point beyond the two large trees, and make the
demonstration there, thus drawing them away from Muro."

John with the six men designated hurried over the intervening ground,
just as two shots, undoubtedly from Muro, broke the quiet, and placed
the watchers on the alert. In less than ten minutes the boys heard a
volley to the right, and almost instantly the opposite slope was alive
with natives running to and fro in all directions, and the most peculiar
cries were heard, while in the distance there was a singular rhythmic
sound as though drums were being beaten, in regular time.

It sounded very weird and fascinating. The drums, if such they were, had
different keys, and their companions did not appear to be able to give
any information about them.

While thus waiting for John to appear, the watchers were surprised to
see the force which was between Uraso and themselves, rushing alongside
the hill, and directly toward their place of concealment. Here was a
problem, not contemplated by John, and the boys consulted the men with
them.

Harry said: "I will do what has always been our custom, that is first
show ourselves, and indicate that we do not wish to be enemies, and try
to gain their confidence."

"I think some of the men should try to talk to them. It is possible that
they may be acquainted with their language. You remember the one we
captured could understand what Muro said," suggested George.

It should be stated that after they landed on the island, four days
previously, they had made a short excursion into the interior, where
they were attacked by a tribe, of which one of the men was captured,
after being wounded, and then taken by the Professor on board the
_Pioneer_, and carried to Wonder Island.

The savages came forward apparently without knowing of the existence of
our party, and when within two hundred feet Harry, and Tarra, one of the
most intelligent of the islanders, stepped forward, and waved their
hands.

The natives stopped in astonishment. Tarra spoke to them, but they were
mute. Then Tarra turned to Harry, and rubbed his nose, and made a sign
of friendship. After some hesitation the leader, who was, from all
appearance a chief, answered, that they demanded the delivery to them of
the wounded man. After this was interpreted Harry assured him that the
man would be restored safe and sound, as soon as he was cured.

At this information the Chief told Tarra that he lied, and that he had
been taken for the purpose of being sacrificed. He was assured that such
was not the case, as they did not believe in sacrificing human beings.

The Chief then demanded that they leave the island at once, or they
would kill all of them. Tarra laughed at this announcement, and his
demeanor was such as to astound the natives. "You do not know what you
say," said Tarra. "The white people who are with us have fire guns,
which kill when they speak," and he held up one of them, and the boys
were amused to see how quickly they began to waver and look about for
shelter.

"We have not come here to injure you," said Tarra. "We want to be
friends."

This appeal did not affect the Chief, but seeing his men disappear he
silently withdrew to the north. They had scarcely gone before Uraso and
his men appeared in the tall grass beyond, and were most heartily
welcomed by the boys.

Uraso laughed as he related their experience. He said that the band came
up, after John and the party left, and in order to make as big a showing
as possible he and his companions hid in the grass, being separated from
each other twenty feet or more, thus making a line over a hundred feet
in length.

The savages did not know that the entire line was occupied only by seven
men. To all appearances the waving of the grass at the different points
along the line, indicated to them the presence of a large force. As a
result they started for the east, instead of going to the south, as
Uraso had calculated they would do, and which indeed they would have
done had they not heard the peculiar savage-made signals of the party
which was hunting Muro.

The movement of the band in that direction drove them directly toward
the watchers who had been left behind by John, and for them to meet a
second party, immediately after they left Uraso, must have been a most
astonishing thing to them.

But the savages were still more confounded, when, after leaving the
boys, they learned from the signals that a third party (the one with
John), was still further to the east.

The first evidence the boys had, that the last party had reached the
main band of savages, was the recurrence of the same peculiar sounds
that were heard during the night.

"They are telling them that we are all over the island. They are worried
about the situation," said Uraso. "John purposely took the men forward
in order to create the impression that our people might be found
everywhere."

"Did you hear the shots that Muro fired?" asked George.

"Yes; they were on all sides of him, undoubtedly, but I am satisfied he
is all right now."

"What makes you think so?"

"For the reason that the natives are retreating, and dare not attack
him. The last signs were those indicating danger. They were entirely
different from those sent out last night."

The peculiar drum beats ceased. Only occasionally could the plaintive
signal cry be heard, and after waiting for more than half hour, the boys
were delighted to see John and Muro appear on the distant hill,
accompanied by the men who were detailed with him.

Muro's story was an interesting one. He went directly east for a
distance of nearly two miles, passing between two different parties, who
were, of course, unaware of his presence. He sent the messenger back
when he met the first natives, and when this messenger was on his way
back he found the savages before him, and they made a rush which he
stopped by the shot which John and the boys heard.

After he had passed the second lot of natives he ascended the second
hill, and beheld, far in the east, the open sea. This, he knew, was a
matter of prime importance to them, as he felt assured it could not be
more than five miles distant.

While investigating the shore line, in order to select some particular
marking point, by means of which they might be able to direct the
_Pioneer_, he was surrounded by the natives. Not that they knew he was
at that particular place, but, as he was now near the rocky headland
which he was seeking, it occurred to him that they might be going on the
same mission, and before he could extricate himself a small band
intercepted him.

He told them that they were friends and not enemies, and tried to win
them over by promises of reward. For some reason or other they declined
to treat with him, and he then had to resort to the rifle to impress
them with the invisible power which he possessed.

This was done by the two shots which the boys heard. They were of course
awed by the explosion, and by the effect of the shots, and since it did
not seem to bring about the desired results, he coolly marched away, and
told them that they dared not follow him.

His bravery undoubtedly proved his salvation, for they were too much
astounded to move at his audacity. He did not go far, because he knew
that his safety lay in keeping himself concealed, since he felt assured
that it would not be long before John would resort to some device to
attract their attention.

His calculations were justified, for within a quarter of an hour he
heard the volley which John ordered, and in an in creditable short space
of time the woods were cleared of the watching natives, who,
undoubtedly, were on the alert to capture him.

"The boys went with me to the foot of the hill," said John. "I knew Muro
would fire three shots if he were in danger. When we were half way up
the hill, we saw the natives stealthily moving around the hill, as
though trying to encircle the position among the rocks. It was enough to
indicate to me that Muro was the one they were stalking.

"We did not shoot at the natives, but intended it merely as a warning.
It was sufficient, for they made for cover at once, and within ten
minutes we heard Muro's signal, and found him safe."

"But isn't that fine about the sea?" said Harry with enthusiasm.

"Yes; and that means we must now send a message to the landing place.
Muro, did you see enough of the shore line to enable you to describe
it?" asked John.

"I was not near enough to tell exactly, but I believe it is directly
east of our landing place, but, of course, on the opposite side of the
island," was his response.

"That will be near enough. Our work is on this side of the island. As
soon as we have quieted down a little you will hear some news," said
John as he glanced at the boys significantly.

The runner was directed to proceed to the landing place, and to remain
there during the night. He was then to return the first thing in the
morning, and would find the party camped at the rocky height beyond.

Without waiting for further explanations, and details of experiences,
they started for the place where they might find some shelter from the
numerous foes, and at which place they might be able to formulate a plan
to get into communication with the natives.

It was late in the afternoon when they gained the rocky heights, and saw
the wild nature of the surroundings.

"How did you know this place was here?" asked Harry.

[Illustration: _Fig. 1. The Marimba._]

"I was here day before yesterday, and it was from this place we started
when we heard your first guns in the battle you had with the natives,"
was John's answer.

"But how does it happen that you did not see the ocean?"

"Well, are you able to see the ocean anywhere from this point?" he was
asked.

The question was a natural one, for when Muro came over the last hill to
the south the sea was visible, but the rocky point was to the north, and
thus out of range.

"Did you hear the singular drum-like sounds this afternoon?"

"They were drums," answered John, "and most peculiar ones, too. I have
not seen the ones used by the natives here, but they have the same
resonant sounds made by certain African tribes, and also by some South
American savages."

"What is it like?" was Harry's next question.

"They are made of flat pieces of wood, very thin, laid over open-topped
gourds. The gourds are, of course, dried, and the dryer they are, the
more resonant the sound."

"Why, that is something like the Xylophone."

"Exactly so. That instrument is of savage origin. Instead of gourds some
tribes use calabashes, which grow to enormous size, and they are highly
prized owing to the quality of the sound they produce when used in this
way."

"But the ones we heard had different tones."

"They use wooden strips of different lengths, exactly like the
Xylophone. They are called Marimbas, balafongs and sansas, by the
various tribes."

While George, Harry and Uraso, were scouting to the north they
unexpectedly came around the corner of a hill, from which they could see
a beautiful valley running to the north, and directly opposite, on a
little plateau, was a type of mountain deer, standing like a sentinel
near the precipitous edge, while below were dozens feeding.

The boys dared not shoot at them, but they remembered the place, and
made up their minds that as soon as they had made friends of the natives
they would have a hunt in this section.




CHAPTER III

CAPTURE OF THE VILLAGE


The most trying time for all adventurers and explorers, is after night
has set in. During the daytime there is always plenty to take up one's
attention and energies, but as the sun goes down the world seems to
contract into a very small space, and when enemies are near the burden
of waiting is a doubly trying one.

The boys had spent many such nights. Whenever John or the Professor were
about these hours were always enjoyed, because like all healthy boys,
they were ever on the alert to ask questions which happened to be
suggested by the experiences of the day.

Now, it is a singular thing, that there is no selfishness in education.
True education is charitable. Those who crave it with the most
eagerness, are always the foremost in wishing to impart it to others.
The honest learner does not resent the listening ear of his fellow
pupils.

Uraso and Muro, the two chiefs, who were the first to conceive the
advantages of education at the hands of John and the Professor, were
always on the alert at the evening meetings, whenever their duties
permitted it, and hundreds of the natives of Wonder Island craved the
privilege of hearing the conversations which took place on all sorts of
topics.

In Unity, the capital of Wonder Island, schools had been established
and were flourishing, and all the children were pupils, so that within
another generation there would be a tremendous change for the better
among those people.

There was nothing more enjoyable to the boys than to see the intense
interest manifested by the common natives, when night came on, and they
expected one of the treats which they knew would be in store for them.

On these occasions George and Harry were usually the questioners, but
many times they saw that some of the men seemed to desire additional
information, and by degrees the boys encouraged them to put the
questions, and to seek inquiries.

This had a very stimulating effect. John was delighted at the spirit
thus developed, and he gave it a still broader range by refusing
sometimes to answer the questions, and thus inviting answers from the
men themselves.

Thus discussion developed. It taught them to begin to think for
themselves. If men know that the ready answer is always at hand, it
prevents the mind from expanding. The evenings, therefore, were seasons
of enjoyment, alike to the men as well as to the boys.

After they had reached the cove in the rocks, and all the dispositions
had been made for the night, John warned the men that while the natives
were no doubt, in consternation, the utmost care must be observed to
prevent any surprises.

The moon had not yet arisen, but there was a beautiful clear sky. The
great Southern Cross hung in the heavens like a giant lantern. On one
side, and on line with each other, shone the two brightest stars in the
heavens, the first being the Dog Star Sirius, and the next in order,
Canopus, the one white, and the other a yellowish white.

Then, on the other side of the Great Cross, sparkled Antares, the
brilliant red star, of the first magnitude, while Spica, another star
made up a most remarkable combination of heavenly orbs.

George had always been impressed with the appearance and the arrangement
of the stars, and he was struck by the intense interest which all
savages manifested in astronomy.

"Your observations are correct," said John, when the discussion began.
"Almost all of the savage rites, their feasts and religious ceremonials,
have something to do with the appearances and the movements of the
heavenly bodies."

"I suppose the grouping of the stars, when they named these groups of
the planets after animals, and the like, was done by the ancients, and
really meant something in a religious way," ventured Harry.

"It is difficult really to determine the origin of what is called the
Zodiac. From the evidence attainable it was known to the Babylonians,
over 2300 years before the Christian era. They divided the heavens into
twelve parts, each cluster of stars representing some fanciful animal or
being, such as the Lion, or the Bear, or the Dragon."

"Isn't it funny that the tribes here, as well as some on Wonder Island
have an idea that the dark moon is caused by the Great Spirit trying to
hide it in anger?" asked George.

"It is singular when it is considered that the same superstition is
found in many, many tribes, on different continents, and it induces the
belief that this idea had one common origin, and that the people all
sprang from one source, or, that the different peoples worked out the
ideas independently of each other."

This statement caused considerable discussion, the natives being of the
opinion that the idea was worked out by the different peoples and could
not have been spread broadcast by one set of people.

"Why do you think it could not have come from one race?" asked George,
as Uraso urged.

"Because," he answered, "how did the people in olden times cross the big
ocean? Even now, people like my own, dare not venture on the sea, for
any distance from shore."

"But," said John, "the surface of the earth was not originally like it
is now. In many places over the earth, new lands have appeared,--that
is, they come up out of the sea, and other lands have disappeared. We
have records of islands, and parts of continents, hundreds of times
larger than Wonder Island, which have disappeared in a single day. One
of those, near Japan, sank, and engulfed over 200,000 people."

"You surprise me," said Muro.

"Furthermore, there is pretty conclusive evidence that the continents of
Europe and America, were once joined, or that there was an immense
continent, called Atlantis between the eastern and western hemispheres."

"I read something on that subject some time ago, in which the writer
denied that such a thing was possible," said Harry.

[Illustration: _Fig. 2. The Atlantean Plateau._]

"I am aware of that, but there are some things which are difficult to
explain, unless the two hemispheres were once united, or, at any rate,
were close enough together to permit travel from one part to the other."

"What evidence is there on that point?"

"Well, in the first place, the root of the languages in Central America,
and in Mexico, are the same as in the corresponding latitude in Europe
and Africa. Then the Pyramids of Mexico are built on the same plan, and
located, astronomically, the same as those in Egypt."

"But could not the ancients have crossed the seas, and in that way given
the same knowledge to both sections?"

"There is absolutely no evidence that the ancients had vessels capable
of traversing 2000 miles of ocean."

"But the book I read said that the Western Hemisphere merely broke away
from the main body of the land, and that is why the people here knew all
that those in Europe had learned."

"That is very plausible, and for the purpose of giving you a fair
understanding of the matter, I make a sketch, showing (Fig. 2), the
Atlantean theory, in which the western shores of Europe and Africa, and
the eastern shores of North and South America are outlined, and between
them, in dotted lines, is Atlantis, the only part of that vast continent
now being visible being the Azore Islands, at the northern extremity."

"But what evidence is there that such a continent existed? Is it only a
theory?"

"It is supported by some evidence, much of which, like the account
which the Egyptian priests gave to Solon, would take too long to state;
but some years ago, while Darwin was engaged in making the deep sea
soundings in the ship _Challenger_, it was found that the bed of the
Atlantic showed a raised plateau, where the legendary Atlantis was
claimed to be."

"But might it not be possible that the other theory could be correct,
also,--that is, that North America merely broke away, and in breaking
away, left Atlantis as an island?"

"I do not see how it can be reconciled. In the first sketch (Fig. 2),
note the shape of the continent of Atlantis. Now, in the next sketch
(Fig. 3), I have brought the two continents close up to each other. The
outlines appear similar, and it would be difficult to make them fit
together, if Atlantis should be placed there, or left in that space,
after the breaking apart."

The discussion was closed for the night and arrangements made for sleep
and sentry duty.

Frequently during the night the beating of the singular drums was heard.
After the entertainment of the evening both Muro and Uraso undertook
some scouting on their own account. The boys were awake early, and then
learned of their expeditions.

Three miles north of the rocky point the main village was located. They
had crept forward cautiously until close enough to learn that there must
be fully five hundred inhabitants. But what was more surprising still,
was the evidence they obtained that the tribes believed in the Hoodoos
and the witch doctors.

[Illustration: _Fig. 3. The Severed Hemispheres._]

The boys were jubilant at the information, and John was full of smiles
as he imparted the information. The difficulty was to get into
communication with the natives, as their efforts of the preceding day
did not offer much encouragement in that direction.

The fact that the people on the island observed peculiar rites was
evidence to John that they must be steeped in the superstitions that are
a necessary part of the craft of the witch doctors, and to the boys, as
well as to Uraso and Muro, the opportunity for John to match his
intelligence with the crafty Krishnos, was awaited with interest.

It was shown on Wonder Island, that while the people had the most
implicit confidence in their medicine men, they were the first to cause
their overthrow when it was shown that they maintained their superiority
through deceit.

Before nine o'clock the drums began to beat. They were plainly heard, as
there was a slight breeze from that direction. John selected fifteen of
the warriors, and accompanied by the boys, and Muro and Uraso, started
for the village.

"You are to remain here until you get word from us. If you should hear
heavy firing it will be the signal for you to come on without delay. In
such a case approach cautiously, and rush them, so as to reach us. We do
not want to cause the loss of a single life among them, except as a last
resort to save our own. Otherwise you are not to leave the cove. One
must be sent to the height beyond, to keep a watch for the _Pioneer_.

"If the vessel is sighted send a runner to the shore, and try to get
into communication with it, so they may know where we are.

"As soon as Tarra returns, send him forward to us without delay. He
should be back before noon to-day." John was thus precise to deliver the
instructions, because he did not know what their reception was likely to
be at the village.

As stated, his prime object was to prevent the sacrifice of captives, if
such there should be, or to put off the rites which he knew would take
place that day and the next.

They marched down the hill, taking all precautions on the way, but they
met no opposition. Beyond them was a well wooded plain, and at intervals
they could see, in the distance, detached huts, and in many places
evidences of crude cultivation of the soil.

The huts were unoccupied, but it was evident from their appearance that
they had been used up to that very day.

"I cannot understand why no people are living here," remarked George.

"They have gone to the village to attend the sacred rites," responded
Uraso.

They were now less than a mile from the village, which could be seen in
the distance through the trees. Something unusual was taking place to
their left, and more than a mile away. Uraso agreed to go in that
direction, and gain the slight elevation, which might afford him an
opportunity to discover the cause of the excitement.

There was considerable shouting, and then the beating of the drums,
which they had not heard since the early morning. Uraso was gone not to
exceed a half hour.

"They are having something unusual in that quarter. A number of natives
have just come in, and a hundred, or more, from the village met the
visitors. I cannot account for the demonstration," observed one of the
boys.

"It is quite likely," suggested John, "that some other tribe has come in
to attend the ceremonies."

"I do not think so, because the visitors belong to the same people who
live in the village."

John was determined to go on, and they proceeded, reaching the outlying
portion of the village, just as the visitors, and those from the village
were entering it from the other angle.

"They have a prisoner there," said Muro. "I am sure that man in the
first group is being conducted to the village."

"Unquestionably, Muro is correct. It is plain that a party of the
villagers have captured the man, and the excitement we heard was caused
by that fact." And John began to speculate on the probability of the
island containing more than the one tribe.

"That man is a native, I am sure," was Uraso's observation.

"That looks like Tarra," said George, in excitement.

This announcement had an electrical effect on those present. If such
should prove to be the case, what likelihood was there that he had
delivered the message at the landing? Was he captured going, or coming.

"It looks to me as though he was captured this morning," observed Harry,
"because if he had been taken last night, on his way over, they would
not wait until to-day to bring him in."

This looked like a reasonable supposition; but they must first make sure
that it was Tarra.

"Forward march!" said John.

But before they had time to go far the whole town seemed to be alive.
From every part of the village men were running, and forming in the open
space next the first row of huts.

It was a most curious proceeding that the boys now witnessed. In the
center of the warriors was a large man, with a curious garb. On each
side of him were noticed men with dissimilar clothing, but bedecked with
every sort of device, the peculiarities of which could not be
distinguished, owing to the distance.

"That large man in the middle, is the Chief, and those about him are the
witch doctors. The Chief has brought the witch doctors so as to terrify
and destroy us," and John laughed as he remembered some of the wiles of
that class on Wonder Island.

To the beating of the drums, the Chief marched forward, his men
following, and closing in on his sides to afford him protection. John
motioned Uraso and Muro to step forward, and they advanced twenty feet
beyond the warriors, and awaited the Chief.

The latter stopped when within hailing distance, and John held up a
hand. Uraso then addressed the Chief, telling him that they came as
friends, and not as enemies, and desired to be present at the ceremonies
about to take place.

He also recited that they came from a neighboring island, where they
had a wonderful village, where all the people were happy, and they now
wanted to show, their friendship by offering presents.

The Chief was silent, and then said: "Why did you kill my people?"

"We only defended ourselves. Your warriors were the ones who attacked
us. We could have killed all of your warriors if we had been enemies."

"You speak lies," answered the Chief. "Why did you take my warrior?"

"Because he was wounded and we are making him well, and will then return
him to you so he can tell you that what we say is true."

"You are again speaking lies," he retorted. Notwithstanding the manner
in which Uraso had steeled himself, he was visibly affected by the blunt
manner in which the savage accused him, but he was judicious enough not
to appear disturbed.

"Ask him," said John, "what he wants us to do to prove that we are
friends, and not enemies."

The Chief, at this question, drew himself up proudly, and answered: "You
are on my dominion, and you have no right to ask any favor from me. You
must deliver yourself up as prisoners, and we shall then deal with you
as we see fit."

"In what way will you deal with us? Have we committed a wrong? Do you
intend to punish us?"

"You had no right to come here. Every one who does so without my
permission, must die."

"Then you expect us to surrender so you may kill us?"

"Yes."

"Then our Chief tells you that he has a right to come here, and that
you have no right to prevent it, and that if you try to kill us we will
have the Great Spirit visit you the same as he visited your warriors the
other day," said Uraso.

The Chief was astounded at the audacity of the visitors. He could not
understand the presumption of Uraso, and the defiant attitude of the
little group behind him.

"Then I command the Korinos to destroy you!" he shouted.

Muro turned to the boys, and smiled as he said: "Do you know what he
means? He calls them Korinos. On Wonder Island they are Krishnos. That
seems pretty close to the same thing."

Uraso held up a hand, as he said: "I have a Korino here (pointing to
John), and he will destroy your Korinos."

The witch doctors then ranged themselves in front of the Chief, and the
latter said: "They will sacrifice your friend who came to us to-day."

To the astonishment of all, Tarra was led forward, and ordered to kneel
down. Then a great burly man, clothed in the garb so common to the
sorceress among savage tribes, followed him with a huge knotted club.

"Tell him that if he raises the club I will order the Korino to die."

This was imparted, but it made no difference to the executioner. He
stepped forward, and slowly raised the club, but before it had reached
its highest point, a revolver in the hands of John spoke, and the savage
dropped the club, and slowly sank to the earth.

It would be impossible to describe the consternation that showed itself
at this catastrophe.

"Come here, Tarra," cried John.

Tarra leaped to his feet, and with a few bounds was at Uraso's side,
while Harry jumped forward and cut the thongs that bound his hands.

The Chief was bewildered, no less than those around him. No effort was
made to prevent Tarra from escaping. The other Korinos did not even go
forward to the relief of their slain comrade. He lay there motionless.

"I am sorry," said John. "I must have made a miscalculation, but I am
afraid he is dead."

Then one of the Korinos moved toward the fallen man. "Stop!" cried John.
"It will be death for any one to touch him now!"

Uraso hurriedly informed the Chief of this new piece of information,
which, in reality, caused more terror than the shot itself. What species
of sorcery was this that they dared not even touch the victim who
disobeyed the white Korino?




CHAPTER IV

RESCUING A WHITE CAPTIVE


"Did you deliver the message at the landing place?" asked George, after
Tarra was freed.

"No; they captured me late last night. I tried for hours to get through,
but they were within a mile of the landing," answered Tarra.

"But where have you been all this time?"

"They took me north to another village."

But more interesting things were now happening. The witch doctor who was
about to go to his fallen companion, hesitated. He turned to the Chief.
The latter merely stretched out his hand, and with an impatient gesture
appeared to order him on.

"I warn you!" said Uraso. "It will be death to touch him."

If there is one thing, more than another, that is liable to add terror
to a low order of human beings, it is noise. It may be said that the
most intelligent are not entirely devoid of the feeling of fear at
inexplainable noises.

As an example, take the sensations produced by thunder and lightning,
one which affects the ear, and the other the eye. During a thunderstorm,
the feeling of fear becomes acute only when the roar is heard.

In this case we know what it is that produces the reverberations; but
even under those circumstances many people are seriously affected by it.
A terrific explosion, of which we do not know the cause, is often the
source of great terror.

This is particularly true with all savage people. The drums referred to,
evidence this particular feeling of awe, and the louder and more
violent, the more intense is it to the untutored mind. It is with this
idea in their minds that they exercise the bad spirits by driving them
away by making great noises, a practice true of most savage tribes.

When John returned to Wonder Island from the United States he had taken
with him several of the well-known Silencers, which, when attached to
the muzzle of a gun, will so deaden the sound that no explosion is
heard.

[Illustration: _Fig. 4. Silencer. Convolute Blades._]

For general use, John knew that the unmuffled gun would be far more
effective than those equipped with the new invention. Smokeless powder
was also used in the guns which John and his company carried. The
absence of smoke thus centers the mind of the native on the sound alone,
and he sees the effect on the victim.

To the savage the sound and the effect of the shot produce the sensation
that there is something more than human in the discharge. It is hard for
them to form an idea of the connection between the report and the
mission of the bullet. It is some monster which speaks in a loud voice.

But it was more than that to the islanders when they saw the witch
doctor fall. There was a white Korino who spoke with a voice of thunder.
They were not aware that he held something in his hand like a weapon,
and the noise and the result of that noise stunned them.

John also carried a revolver with one of the silencers. When the Korino
turned to the Chief, and the latter, determined not to be swayed by the
power of the white man, there was but one thing for him to do. He must
obey. He knew that if he shrunk from the task it would be a confession
that his power was gone.

The man approached the prostrate form. "Stop!" again cried Uraso. "The
white Korino will not again speak, but if he touches the body you will
die!"

He stood there for a moment, irresolute, and then slowly stooped down,
and with hesitation at every motion, finally touched the figure. In the
meantime John had leveled the revolver with the silencer, and as the man
again rose to an erect position, and glanced at John defiantly, he
quickly threw up his hands and fell forward across his former companion
with a shot through his arm, as it was not John's intention to kill him
if it could by any possibility be avoided.

The white Korino had not spoken, as Uraso predicted, but the results
were the same. The savages who were lined up on both sides of the Chief,
began to waver. They were moving to the rear. The Korinos around the
Chief, finally broke and fled, and when the people saw this evidence of
fear on the part of their Wise Men, they could not be restrained.

The Chief followed them hurriedly. "Now, quickly, boys, fire two rounds.
No; not at the natives, but up in the air."

The boys could not understand what John could mean by such an order, but
they did not have an opportunity to ask the reason for it.

After the volleys John turned to Muro and Uraso, and remarked: "As soon
as the men come up you and Muro must contrive in some way to find out
the direction that the Korinos have taken."

They now saw the object of the volleys. It would bring up those of their
party who had remained at the rocky cove. The watch for the Korinos was
equally plain. The experience on Wonder Island showed that the witch
doctors inhabited the caves.

In the excitement they had entirely forgotten this part of their
enterprise. They thought of the treasure. John had the treasure of the
records in his mind. The hills all about; the limestone formations of
the elevations were ample assurance to his mind that some caverns would
be found; and while they might, eventually, be able to locate the
entrances, it would be better to find out where they were by watching
and charting the direction they took on their way to the dark places
where they hoped to rest in fancied security.

Within fifteen minutes their rear guard came into sight, rushing over
the hills, all expectant to find an enemy in their front. Great was
their surprise to see the village beyond, and John and his party
bending over the two bodies, one of them moving and the other inert.
Apparently, he and his force were unconcerned, although many savages
were in the village, and in plain sight.

An examination of the fallen men made John happy, because he feared that
his aim had been untrue. Both had been severely wounded, and when an
hour afterwards both men were able to move, thanks to the knowledge and
care of John, they were carried into the village.

Before this was done, however, John ordered the force to march boldly
into the village. On the approach of the party the Chief and his
followers, together with the women and children, hurriedly fled to the
north.

Among the huts were found a dozen or more sick and injured men and
women, and a number of old people who were unable to be carried away.
John went to each, and after carefully examining them, administered
medicine.

In one place they found two warriors, who had been wounded in the battle
four days previously. These were given special attention, the villagers
meanwhile looking on the proceeding with a feeling of awe, and wonder.
They could not comprehend the care and treatment which was being given
them.

John's companions were most eager to render aid, and spoke to the
patients freely, telling them that they were friends, and not enemies.
During this investigation into every corner of the village, George and
Harry were the most active. They found many amusing things, but the care
of the sick and the infirm was the first duty, and they had many
willing helpers.

While thus engaged they reached a long, low thatched enclosure, so
entirely different from the huts scattered about. There was no visible
opening. They walked around the enclosure with more and more curiosity.
Some of their companions from Wonder Island then drew near.

"We have found it!" cried one of them.

"What is it?" asked Harry.

"This is the place where they keep the captives."

"But how can we get into it?" asked George, then adding, "Get one of the
hatchets, quickly."

Several men ran back and opened the packages containing their equipment,
and others followed to see the prisoners. Uraso was one of the first to
come up, and he was soon followed by John, all in excitement over the
news. George was the first one to get a hatchet. He soon chopped a way
through, and Uraso was the first to crawl into the enclosure, followed
by George.

The latter staggered back, as he saw the scene before him. The enclosure
was fully fifteen feet high, and occupied a space, probably, twenty feet
each way. It was constructed of a species of bamboo, exceedingly hard,
two rows of these paling being driven into the ground close together, so
that it was impossible to see through the stockade at any point.

Within there was absolutely nothing but the bare ground, and a mass of
indescribable filth, as may be imagined. Here, lying on the earth, were
five men, with little or no clothing, covered with dirt and vermin. Two
of them were in fairly good condition, an evidence that they had not
long been prisoners.

[Illustration: "_'Stop!' cried John, 'It will be death for any one to
touch him'_" [See p. 52]]

The other three were emaciated, and what surprised the boys most was the
long, matted and tangled beard of one of the three. The moment John saw
that form he turned to the boys and fairly shrieked: "This is a white
man. Cut down that fence, so the men can be taken out, and the moment
they are removed set fire to this place."

The boys could not understand John's vehement expression.

"Shall we burn the village?" asked Harry.

"Oh, no! Burn only this enclosure, and don't let a vestige of it
remain."

His orders were quickly carried out. Meanwhile, not a quarter of a mile
away, were the Chief and the owners of the village, who, upon seeing the
smoke and the flames, appeared to be frantic. No doubt they regarded it
as a sign that the village was doomed, but they were soon reassured by
the time the stockade was finally consumed, and the few watchers
reported to the Chief that nothing but the prison had been destroyed.

"We have destroyed the Bastille," remarked John, "and must now take care
of the prisoners." They found that it was indeed a white man who had
been rescued. He was frightfully emaciated, and too weak to talk.

This was also the condition of the two natives. The other two were soon
restored, after receiving nourishment, and were ready to tell their
story. They had been taken two weeks previously in a battle with the
tribe to the north.

Through these men they learned that there were only two tribes on the
island, and that this was by far the largest, in point of numbers. There
had been continual war between the two people, and the only thing which
saved his tribe from extermination was the fact that they lived in the
mountain regions, and were thus protected.

This information was very welcome to John and the boys. The mountains
seemed to have a fascination for them,--and then, the caves, how could
they forget them now?

For three hours the Chief and his people waited in the distance. John
did not pay any attention to them, apparently. Shortly thereafter two of
his men came in, dragging one of the former patients.

"We saw him trying to steal away," said one of the men.

"Was he going toward his people?" asked John.

"Yes."

"Then let him go, by all means, and tell him that we would be glad to
have the Chief and his people return."

The poor fellow was astonished to learn that he was free. He was as much
surprised at this as at the care which they had bestowed to cure him. He
passed through the village, looking about him with furtive glances, but,
at the command of John, no one paid any attention to him.

When he reached the Chief there was a long consultation, and it was
evident that a momentous change was taking place. The Chief could be
seen constantly glancing toward the village, and soon the self-imposed
messenger returned and approached John.

"The Chief is willing to see you, and will come to you, if you wish it."
This was imparted to John, and the latter responded:

"I will go with you."

He called the two chiefs Muro and Uraso, and the boys, and told them he
would go with the messenger to the Chief, alone, and that they should
have no fear for him.

Accompanied by the messenger, John walked boldly to the Chief, and going
up, pressed his nose against him, in token of eternal friendship, and
then motioned him to go back to the village.

The Chief was astounded, first, at the bravery of John in thus coming to
him, and in then vowing eternal friendship.

There is something very peculiar in the characteristics of savages which
forbids them from violating a peace pledge, or a treaty of friendship
when entered into with the rites that they acknowledge. The most formal
of these rites, is that of rubbing noses together.

How the custom originated, is not known. It is something like the kiss,
in so far as it is a visible token of either love, friendship, or
esteem. It is seldom that the savage violates the pledge which is thus
given. John knew this, and felt assured the great Chief would respect
it.

When the latter came into the village, the first sight that met his
eyes, was the demolished stockade. He looked at it for a moment, in
silence. Then some of the old men came forward, and began to tell him
the wondrous tales of kindness.

The Chief went to his own home, and when he saw that everything was
untouched, and that none of the people was harmed, he could not
understand the actions of the White Chief, and so expressed his
astonishment to Uraso and Muro. When he was told that the latter were
Chiefs of two tribes on Wonder Island, he was still more surprised.

"Do you not fight each other?" he asked.

Uraso smiled, as he answered: "Why should we fight? There is no pleasure
in killing, or in causing suffering. We used to think about those things
as you do."

"What made you think otherwise?"

"The White Chief told us it was wrong, and we have found that his words
were true."

"Where is this place where your tribe may be found?"

"It is on the other side of the sea, over there," answered Uraso,
pointing to the west.

"Will it take long to get there?"

"It takes only one sun, and the White Chief would be so happy to take
you there and show you the great village, and to see the people and the
Chiefs who live together in happiness, and to learn from the people
themselves how they enjoy their homes, and make the many curious things
that the White Chief has brought over for you."

The Chief looked about him, and finally said: "I want to see the White
Chief."

John had purposely refrained from going to the Chief's home, but Uraso
accompanied him at John's request, because he was the more diplomatic,
and wielded a stronger influence than Muro, owing to his remarkable
personality.

John was glad of the opportunity, and the boys, as usual, were also
present. The Chief's eyes followed the two boys, as they entered. He
smiled at them, as John came up and greeted him.

Uraso told John what they had talked about, and that the Chief was
interested in his story of Wonder Island.

"Our Great Chief will welcome you to Wonder Island," said John.

The Chief looked at John for a moment, and then his eyes wandered to
Uraso, as he answered: "Is there still a greater Chief? Is there a man
more powerful than this Chief?"

Uraso laughed, as did John. "Tell him," said John, "that our Chief is
powerful, because he is wise."

He did not seem to understand this, and asked for more information.
Uraso told him that the white man did not regard the strong man as the
greatest, but that the wisest man was always the Chief.

Here was certainly a new philosophy. "But," he inquired, "then how can
he rule his people, if he is not strong?"

"The people willingly submit to his will because they know what he says
is best for them."

"But does not the Chief sometimes tell them lies, and does he not often
deceive them?"

"Yes; but when they do so then the people choose another Chief in his
place."

"And after they have killed the first Chief, and have taken another,
and he lies, do they also kill him?"

"No; they do not kill the Chiefs, but they only put others in their
places."

"Then they are not wise Chiefs?"

"No; they are wise only when they do what is right."

"Do what is right! What do you mean by that? How can the Chief do
anything but right?"

"Do you think," asked Uraso, "that the Chief has a right to lie or
deceive?"

"Yes, he can do that, but not his people. It is wrong for them to do
so."

"But the white man believes that it is just as wrong for the Chief to
lie and to deceive, as for the people to do so."

The Chief was silent for a long time, and John purposely permitted him
to reflect on the new dispensation. While thus musing on the new theory,
a woman carrying a child appeared at the door. John saw her, and,
stepping out, took the child from her arms. She permitted it, and when
the Chief appeared she fell down and explained that the White Chief had
been very kind to her.

John took some medicine from a small vial, and administered it, the
Chief meanwhile looking on in astonishment. Here was a great White
Chief, looking out for the comfort of one of the poorest of his people.

Uraso knew his thoughts. This woman was the poorest and the lowest in
the tribe, and John, without stopping to make any inquiries as to her
condition, or position in life, had aided her and her old mother.

Evidently the new doctrine was something so extraordinary, that it was
worth investigating. Uraso saw the embarrassment in the mind of the
Chief, and after speaking a few words, withdrew.

As they left the Chief's quarters the boys roamed through the village.
The stories of the sufferers which John had aided, the scrupulous care
with which the men guarded the homes of the villagers while they were
absent, had a most telling effect.

The warriors from Wonder Island mingled with the villagers. It was
singular that there was not an expression of hatred. They fraternized,
and related stories of Wonder Island, and the people told them about
their own island.

The boys met many of their own ages, and to them they showed the
revolvers, and the marine glasses, and then astounded them by exhibiting
the watches which they carried.




CHAPTER V

RETURN OF THE NATIVES


Several of the packages left at the landing place, contained numerous
trinkets, and articles of personal adornment, such as the natives
adored. Brightly-colored fabrics, made at the factory on Wonder Island
were also among the many articles, which had been intended to be used as
presents.

John was gratified to learn, an hour or two after the Chief returned,
that the latter had given orders to the villagers to prepare a feast for
the visitors.

"But where are the Korinos?" asked George.

True, they had disappeared.

"Let us see John about that," responded Harry.

They had some time in finding him, but later on learned that he was
attending to the wounded, and caring for the late prisoners.

"It would not be wise to speak to the Chief about that now," responded
John. "The leaven is working well in his mind. Besides, I fear that he
will wreak vengeance on them, and we must prevent him from killing
them."

As the boys were leaving John they saw fifty of the warriors leave the
Chief's home, marching out of the village to the east. Muro entered the
hut where John was staying, and announced that the Chief wished to see
him.

John continued with his work, after informing Muro that he would soon
visit the Chief. The boys later saw John and Muro on their way to the
"Palace," as Harry called the royal residence, and begged John's
permission to accompany them.

The Chief received them with special marks of attention, and John
thanked him for the invitation.

"This is the day which the Wise Men have appointed for the sacrifices,
and the people are preparing the feast, in accordance with our custom.
It is my wish that you shall be my guests, and take part in our
ceremonies," remarked the Chief.

Muro, in behalf of John, thanked him for the invitation, and assured him
that they would gladly join in the rites. Then, he continued: "I wish to
inform you that we left at the seashore, on the other side of the
island, some gifts which I am desirous of presenting to you. If you will
order some of your men to accompany my guides they will bring them
back."

The Chief's eyes lighted up with pleasure. Immediately, a detail of men
were designated, and a half dozen of John's warriors, under the
leadership of Muro, were requested to proceed to the landing.

The people saw the company depart with the greatest wonder and
curiosity. Muro was instructed to leave a message at the landing, and
return with the packages as soon as possible. They reached the landing
place within two hours, and were rejoiced to see the _Pioneer_ anchored
not far from the shore.

Stut was recognized at once, but Sutoto had remained at Wonder Island.
The packages were taken to the _Pioneer_, and Muro informed Stut that
they would sail around the island and land near the village. The men
from the village were awe stricken at the sight of the vessel, and it
was difficult to get their consent to embarking but were soon persuaded,
when presented with some of the gifts, which Muro knew would be
acceptable.

       *       *       *       *       *

An hour after the last interview in the Chief's home, the boys saw the
warriors, who had formerly left the Chief's home, marching down the
street of the village, and guarding the Korinos who had formed part of
the Chief's escort earlier in the day.

They were quite different now in demeanor, and the boys thought they
looked crestfallen. They were ushered into the Chief's presence without
any ceremony.

They stood there like criminals, and felt that their doom was sealed. "I
have sent for you," he said, "because this is the day you have selected
for the ceremonies. Where are the prisoners to be sacrificed?"

They were silent. The Chief continued: "You have told us that the Great
Spirit asks for the sacrifices each year when the sun is leaving us, and
when the moon is hiding behind the vail. Bring the captives so they may
be offered up."

Instantly the Korinos brightened up, and muttered a few words. The Chief
gave an order, and they were marched out of the building. Out of
curiosity, the boys followed. Their steps were directed to the stockade
where the prisoners had been confined.

To their dismay they saw only the ashes, and were staggered at the
sight. They stood there with wondering eyes. The boys could see that
this was a condition wholly unexpected by them, and it must be said that
there was pity in the hearts of Harry and George, as the leader gave the
order for them to return to the "Palace."

As they entered John and the Chief were engaged in an animated
conversation, and when the latter saw the Korinos, he stood up and asked
for the victims.

"They are not there!" was the only response.

The Chief, not affecting to believe, told them that they were lying to
him. They fell to their knees, but were mute.

"But the Great Spirit must not be deceived. Great evil will fall upon us
if he is not appeased. If you cannot find the victims I will do so."

The Chief's voice was terrible in its anger. Outside of their dark homes
the Korinos were subject to the Chief's will. Within the caves they knew
no fear. The boys looked at Uraso and John. A slight smile could be seen
on Uraso's face, as he returned the gaze of the boys; but John's face
was immobile, and did not in the least appear to portray any concern.

"It is my order that you shall be the victims, and must be offered up as
the sacrifices to prevent the anger of the Great Spirit."

This doom was pronounced in a voice so full of anger that its
significance was instantly divined by the boys, although they could not
understand all of the words which he uttered.

They were instantly seized and bound, and being now in a helpless
condition, were carried out of the building, and, with the most brutal
force conveyed by the guard to a hut not far from the Palace, and
literally thrust into the small opening which formed the entrance.

"Do you suppose they will kill them?" asked Harry, as he moved to the
side of Uraso.

"I think the Chief means what he says," and Uraso gave a little smile
that somewhat assured them.

"No; I don't think John will let the Chief kill them," responded George.

After the removal of the Korinos John asked whether it would be possible
to defer the ceremonies until the following day, for the reason that he
desired to distribute the gifts which the men were bringing from the
landing.

"If the White Chief so desires it shall be done."

John manifested his pleasure at the consent thus obtained.

George and Harry now wandered into every part of the village. For the
first time they noticed that it was located at the western edge of a
beautiful grove, thickly wooded, with tall trees.

Through this they walked, and before they emerged were delighted at the
sight of the great ocean beyond. "I wonder if John knows we are so
near?"

They ran to the beach, delighted to have an opportunity for a bath, but
were surprised to see many along the shore with small bags.

"They are searching for something," remarked Harry. "I wonder what it
can be?"

"Possibly clams. Don't you remember the first week when we lived on
clams, after we reached Wonder Island? What delightful days we had; and
how afraid we were of every noise, and used to start up at every new
sound."

"And wasn't it a joy to make the new things, and see every day bring new
wonders to us after we moved to the Cataract?"

"I have a love for that old home. We were so happy there. I know I am
not happier now when we own all the treasures of the caves, than when we
were building the water wheel, and the little shop, and tending the
yaks," answered George, as he gazed across the sea, and thought of the
glorious times and of their wonderful adventures.

When they saw the streams of people coming from the shore they recalled
that the people were preparing for the feast. It was remarkable that
clams were an article of food with these people when those on the island
they had just left, despised all fish and sea food.

They wandered along the beach, fully a mile south of the village, and
quite out of reach of the people, and were soon in the mild surf. After
a half hour of this enjoyment they dressed, and ascended a slight
elevation from which could be seen the character of the land along the
sea.

To the north and south of their position the land was much higher, the
northern portion having the appearance of very high hills, if not
mountains.

"Do you think John was thinking about the caves when the guards brought
in the Korinos?" remarked George, as they were descending the ridge.

"I thought of it," answered Harry. "But I learned from Muro that he
knew where they made their homes!"

"Then he must have watched them, as John suggested!"

"No; one of the men told him just before he left."

"What did he say?"

"That they should follow the trail to the north of the grove until they
reached the sea."

"Then Muro must know that the sea is near?"

"I think he does."

During the descent from the hill the ocean was visible directly to the
east. Both, at the same instant, caught sight of a sail. They gasped in
surprise, as they gazed at the unusual spectacle.

"I would like to know who that can be," queried Harry. "Let us tell John
and then get something so we can signal it."

They rushed down the hill, and ran hurriedly through the streets of the
village, to the surprise of the inhabitants. First going to the Chief's
house, without finding him, they went to the improvised hospital where
the wounded Korinos were being cared for.

There John was found, together with Uraso and the Chief. "We have seen a
sail," shouted George. "We want something to use as a signal." John
bounded up, and Uraso rushed out and soon fished out a white cloth, and
ran down through the grove after the boys.

Three hundred feet to the right was a slight elevation, which the boys
had noticed, and as it was devoid of trees offered the most available
place for the signal flag. They scurried around for some pole which
would answer, and to this the white cloth was quickly attached.

John was the last to reach the signaling point. He was laughing
immoderately, as he noticed the frantic signaling. "Where are your field
glasses, George?"

"They are in the village. I forgot about them."

"If you had used them you would not be surprised at the visitor."

The boys stopped signaling for a moment, and then looked at the ship.

"It isn't possible that is the _Pioneer_?"

"Look again, for yourself; don't you know your own work?"

The ship had seen the signal, and now turned. Then they recognized the
grand little vessel, that was almost a part of themselves, for they had
worked many months to complete her, and had tried to put good luck and
best wishes into every plank and spar and sail.

The Chief, too, was coming. The whole village joined to welcome the
ship, for when Uraso told the Chief that their own ship was coming, he
could not resist the temptation to witness the arrival.

Was it possible that Muro reached the landing place before the ship
left? John thought so, but the boys doubted it. Muro left before noon,
and it was now past five in the evening.

As the vessel neared the shore the people lined up and the boys crowded
close to the shore. They were the first to recognize Muro, to their
great delight. He waved his hand to them, and Stut was by his side.

"Good old Stut!" shouted George. "Where is Sutoto?"

"In Wonder Island!" was the response.

They were disappointed at this, but there was too much for them to think
about, as the anchor was being swung, and as soon as it dropped, a boat
was lowered from each side, and the men began to descend from the short
ladder, while the village people watched the proceeding with silent
wonderment.

Muro was the first to touch the shore, and then came the villagers who
were on the mission with Muro. They were the heroes to their friends.
They knew their duty to their Chief, however, and the latter had a most
animated conversation with them, and particularly so after he had
noticed the array of trinkets which Muro had bestowed on them.

While this was going on the boats returned and bundles and packages were
brought out of the ship and deposited in the boats. After they had been
taken from the boats, John said: "With your permission I will take these
things to your house."

The Chief assented, and on his orders the men in the village gathered up
the assortment of gifts and the procession filed along the path to the
village.

The feast that evening reminded them of the welcome which the Chief
Beralsea extended to them the second night after their arrival at
Venture Island. Besides the clams referred to there was an abundance of
fish, several varieties, besides game and meats, and the only thing
which they seemed to lack, or which was rather meager in quantity, was
fruit.

Like all natives of these islands, they were experts at spitting the
meats. The most delicious was a species of ground hog, that the boys
frequently caught on Wonder Island. The boys had watched the method of
roasting these animals.

A strong green tapering stick, about four feet long was selected, and
the bark was peeled off, so as to give it a smooth surface. The small
end of this was sharpened, and driven through the animal, from end to
end, so that it was held firmly on the stick, midway between its ends.

[Illustration: _Fig. 5. Spitting the Roast._]

Two forked posts were then driven into the ground, about three feet
apart, and the stick laid in the forks. A fire of wood, previously built
between the posts was permitted to accumulate a quantity of coal, and
when a hot fire was thus generated, one of the natives would
continuously rotate the stick, so that the heat affected all sides
evenly, and the result would be the most tempting roast imaginable. This
is a practice common with savages all over the world, varying only in
the details of the preparations.

All the vegetables were roasted, in hot coals. In this respect their
custom was different from the practice followed in Venture Island, for
there they knew how to make stews. Here they knew nothing about pottery,
but like all islanders in the South Seas, the wrecks would, occasionally
cast cooking utensils, like pots, or pans, ashore, and these
highly-prized articles were sure to be taken by the Chiefs, or by the
Krishnos themselves, where they could get them by stealth.

[Illustration: _Fig. 6. Arialad Fruit. Sarsaparilla._]

Unlike the natives of Wonder Island, they had potatoes, the wild variety
which the boys found the second day after they were cast ashore. The
Taro root, that vegetable which grows in the greatest abundance in every
section south of the Equator, to the lower border of the south temperate
zone, was the chief dish, and was also roasted in like manner.

What surprised them most was a drink that pleased John, who at once
recognized its origin. They called it Arialad, and George declared it
was a fine quality of Sarsaparilla.

"You are correct," said John. "Its real botanical name is Arialace. It
belongs to the same family as spikenard and ginseng. Very few natives
know of its value. It is both a medicine and a refreshing drink."

"If it grows in abundance here it would be a good thing to gather for
export," observed Harry.

"A boat load of the roots would be worth a fortune," rejoined John.

There was the utmost good fellowship among all present. In accordance
with the custom among most of these people the women did not partake of
the food in the presence of the men. They acted as the servants in
serving the food, but the men prepared the meal, a sort of well-balanced
family arrangement, as George observed.

"But who washes the dishes?" asked Harry with a laugh, in which all
joined.




CHAPTER VI

THE SAVAGE CEREMONIALS


The next day was the one appointed for the ceremonies. The boys were
expectant, because during all their experiences in the islands, this was
the first time they had an opportunity to witness one of these
spectacles.

It was noticed that no preparations were made for a morning meal by the
natives. All were specially garbed for the occasion, if the colored
decorations counted for anything in the way of additional clothing.

They were adept in the art of weaving cloth, which was made in small
sections, and sewn together, similar to the practice in most of these
primitive countries. They were not altogether devoid of knowledge
pertaining to dyes, the most frequent being blue, which John soon
ascertained came from some copper deposits.

The Madder plant was the most common on the island, and this afforded a
red color, the most lasting of all dyes, and the most generally in use
throughout the civilized world, until the aniline dyes took its place.

For black they resorted to the common method of using carbon which is
the stock material in our own country. This was produced by them from
burnt wood, and not from any of the coal products.

Their faces were painted a hideous red and blue, principally in the
nature of great zig-zag stripes, and the exposed parts, of the bodies
were of diverse figures, some of them really artistic. The preparation
of these personal decorations consumed the greater portion of the night,
as the boys afterwards learned.

When they emerged from their hut in the morning, and saw the grotesque
figures all about the village, they could hardly repress a smile; but as
every one was smiling and happy, they did not have to make any
pretentions, but smiled and laughed as the men and women circled about,
because they couldn't help themselves.

The women were not so gaudily attired as the men. Their decorations were
expended on clothing, as it was not considered good form to decorate
their bodies.

All the men carried spears, and many of them were wicked-looking
instruments. What surprised them was the fact that all the spear-points
were now covered over, or bound up by colored material, forming a sort
of sphere, to which three colored streamers were attached, one white,
one red and the other blue.

"My, but they are patriotic!" remarked George, as he saw the design and
the streamers.

John smiled, as he observed them. "But do you notice that the point of
the spear is covered?"

"I was about to ask the meaning of that," said Harry.

"This is the day of feasting and of sacrifices. The covered point
indicates that there is peace; and that no one can commit an injury. I
imagine the points will be uncovered quickly enough the moment they are
ready for the sacrifices."

"I am more interested in the fact that they use the American colors. I
wish we had one of the flags here. That idea has just struck me as being
the proper thing." And George danced about at the scheme.

Harry was just as much affected now. "Why not consult Uraso and Muro,
and bring over the big flag from the ship?"

John laughed at the idea. "A brilliant idea. The flag will be a big
attraction, but I warn you that if you get it I shall have to insist
that you must head the procession with it."

"Are we going to have a procession?"

"I believe that is the first thing on the list."

"But where is the procession going? Is it the custom to march along the
principal streets and out along the boulevards?"

This idea was so laughable to Harry and Uraso and Muro, that they had a
fit of laughter. The two Chiefs were just like boys, and entered in to
the spirit of the undertaking with a vim that pleased the boys.

They fairly flew to the landing, and manned the boat. "We have come for
the flag," announced George, as Stut was looking on the excitable boys.

"Why not take both of them?" responded Stut.

"Certainly," answered Harry. "I had forgotten about the other. And while
we are about it, why not have the band come along?"

This was answered by a shout. One of the new acquirements of the natives
of Wonder Island, was music, and when the boys returned from the States
they brought along several fine sets of band instruments, one set of
which was always on the vessel, and was used for evening concerts.

"Where is Mano?" asked Harry.

Mano was the leader of the ship's band, but he was not to be found.

"John sent for Mano an hour ago, and he is now in the village."

"Then send for him at once. Tell him he must be here as soon as John is
through with him," said George.

While the flags were being wrapped up one of the small boats came from
the shore, and Mano stepped out.

Harry ran up and said: "Get the boys and the instruments ready. You must
play for us to-day during the ceremonies."

Mano smiled as he answered: "John told me about it last night, and I
went over merely to find out what music I should take."

"So John tried to steal a march on us?" remarked Harry. "How soon will
you be ready?"

"We are all ready now. I was told at the Chief's house that the
procession would start in a half hour."

When the flags were brought out it was Mano's time to stare. "I think,"
he said, "that will surprise John, but the idea is a proper one."

The band comprised nine musicians and the two drummers. The moment they
landed the band formed four abreast, and directly behind were the two
boys with the Stars and Stripes. To the tune of "Columbia, the Gem of
the Ocean," they marched straight to the home of the Chief.

The crashing music, and the magnificent flags brought pandemonium to
that savage village. Nothing like it had ever been known before. Long
before the band reached the Palace all the inhabitants of the town had
rushed down, and at Uraso's and Muro's suggestion the people followed
behind, and thus made a procession which was the most unique that it was
possible to describe.

"That scheme will make a success of the ceremonies," remarked George,
almost too full for utterance. "Why the thing wouldn't be a success
without the flags and the music."

"I wonder how the thing will fit in when it comes to the sacrifices this
afternoon? I imagine the Korinos ought to feel like dying when they are
to have such an unusual funeral procession?" Harry said this with a bit
of irony, as he turned to George and grinned at the idea.

John knew what was coming, but the Chief didn't. He and John came out
together, when they heard the music. The boys, behind the band could not
see the great sights that were taking place in the rear, but John stood
there beside the big Chief, and was simply convulsed with laughter.

The natives were not walking. They were dancing, and the Chief, at first
astounded at the music, and at the waving flags, soon joined John in
laughter as they witnessed this remarkable scene.

Uraso had taken part in numerous celebrations at Unity, and knew what
disposition to make of the people when they arrived. The band marched
past, and John raised his hand in the form of a salutation, and the
Chief noticing this imitated him.

"The old fellow is learning rapidly how to do the correct thing,"
suggested Harry.

"Yes; John will have him in a swallow-tail coat before night."

The band marched past, and then turned around and came back, and as fast
as the people came up Uraso and Muro directed them where to stand, so
that when the band stopped they formed a large semi-circle facing the
Chief and John.

The boys walked forward so they stood with the flags midway between the
band and the Chief. The latter motioned for the band to continue. John
understood, and a new tune was struck up. The Chief was fascinated. When
that tune was concluded, the Chief wanted another, quite forgetting the
importance of the ceremonial rites.

While the last tune was being played the boys saw a tall man, with a
huge spear, and a face most hideously painted. His body had
characteristic stripes, entirely unlike those of the other people.
Behind him marched the Korinos, without a sign or mark on them different
from the costumes worn by them on the preceding day.

As they filed along behind the leader, the boys noticed that the first
one carried a thong-like rope: the second a knife; the third a sort of
vessel, and the fourth a pair of short sticks.

The people paid no attention to them, while the band was playing, but
when it ceased, it was evident that they shrunk back from these dreaded
men.

John beckoned Uraso and Muro to come forward, and the Chief welcomed
them. "As chiefs of your tribes you should be here with us. The White
Chief tells me that in his country the band and the flag always go
first, and I have asked him to tell us how we should march to the
forest."

John then told those present how the procession should form. The band
was marched to the front, and George, who had the small flag, was placed
directly behind the band. Then the Chief, with Uraso and Muro on either
side, and directly behind them Harry took position with the large flag.

After the flag the Korinos, without their tall leader, however, were
placed in line. John then motioned to the people to take their places
following the Korinos, and the moment the column was thus formed the
band struck up a lively marching tune, and John accompanied by the tall
fantastic leader, went ahead of the band.

The leader knew, of course, where the procession must go, and he thus
wisely made the arrangement for the occasion. The procession wended its
way directly to the north, along a well-beaten path, and after ascending
a hill, turned to the left, and entered a sort of grove.

The boys were delighted to notice the magnificent Magnolia trees in full
bloom, the flowers of which surpassed anything they had ever seen, and
the perfume was almost overpowering in its intensity.

To the boys this peculiar procession had something mysterious about it.
Neither John, nor the two Chiefs had any idea of its significance. John
directed a questioning look toward the articles which the Korinos
carried.

When the crest of the hill was reached they made one complete circle,
and the head of the column stopped before the most magnificent magnolia
tree in the grove. The leader marched along the line and the people soon
formed themselves into a circle with the tree in the center.

All chatter had stopped. While ascending the hill, and up to this time,
there was a never ending clatter of voices; but now all were quiet, and
gazed to the top of the tree. The tall leader, at the nod of the Chief
came forward and approached the tree, and with the long spear struck it
three times, and then turned to the Korinos, who had now followed him.

Then, he turned again, and struck the tree three times more, and this
was repeated the third time. After stepping back he raised the spear,
and held it over the head of the Korino who carried the rope. The latter
stepped to the tree and with a dextrous throw sent a coil of rope over
the first limb and caught the other end of it.

The spear was then laid over the head of the man with the knife, and he
sprang forward grasping the rope, and when the spear was poised on high,
he gracefully crept hand over hand up the rope.

The instant the man's hand seized the rope the people fell to the ground
and covered their faces. The boys did not want to lose this part of the
ceremony, you may be sure, but they tried to observe the rites.

A side glance was sufficient to assure them that the Chief did not
kneel, nor did either John, Uraso or Muro; but they were privileged
characters, so the boys went through the ceremony by peering through
their fingers, and at the same time trying to find out whether there
were not others trying to do the same.

The man went up and up, and soon emerged from the last spare branches at
the top, until his face was near the great white flower which grew on
the tip.

"I think that is the flower all the people were looking at," said George
in a whisper.

The man raised the knife, and with one slash severed the stem. Then,
raising himself up to his full height, so his body could be plainly
seen, he waved the flower about his head three times, and the leader at
the base of the tree again struck the trunk three times.

Immediately the people arose and placed their hands before them exactly
like a bather on a perch about to dive, and with the palms of the hands
thus placed against each other, the arms were raised to a vertical
position, and lowered three times.

With hands still in their lowered position, and eyes cast on the ground,
the Korino in the tree slowly descended, and the one who threw the rope
quickly detached it from the tree.

The spear was then placed over the head of the man with the sticks. He
crossed his legs and sat down, and with an exceedingly rapid motion,
soon caused smoke to arise, and then a tiny flame appeared.

"Why didn't they tell us about it, and we could have let them use some
of our matches," said George dryly, as Harry made a great show of
indignation at the irrelevant remark.

A fire was quickly kindled, and the man with the bowl knelt down, after
fixing two stones on opposite sides of the fire. From a small receptacle
he took a powder, and dropped it into the bowl, and after holding the
flower aloft, the man who took it from the tree, dropped it into the
smoking bowl.

Instantly the people resumed their natural poses, and began to dance.
The Chief spoke a word to Uraso, and the band struck up a lively tune.
Then, to the ringing blare of the band, and the shrieks and shouts of
the people the dance began. It was one continuous whirl, and many of
them became frenzied.

The Chief himself participated in this part of the ceremony, and swung
himself around and around in a giddy whirl. During all this time each
fellow was for himself. They did not have partners as in the civilized
dances.

The tangoing was an individual effort, and each enjoyed it in his own
way, but they all kept step to the music, showing the savage
characteristic of being able to observe rhythmic effects.

The boys caught the spirit of the occasion, and joined in the wild
swirl. Uraso and Muro were at it, and the sole spectator was John, who
said that he felt too old to learn the new steps.

When the band stopped the people rested, but there was no disposition to
break up the merry party, and when the music again struck up the whole
scene was acted over again. It was noon before the grand ball ceased.

Then, at a sign from the Chief the procession reformed, and went back
over the trail, the people dancing all the way, and, apparently, without
exhibiting any signs of weariness, although it must be stated that the
band was nearing collapse, when the people dispersed.




CHAPTER VII

SIGNIFICANCE OF NATIVE RITES


As heretofore stated, there had been no morning meal, and the dancing
must have been a trying task, under those conditions.

"It would have been much better if we had something to eat before this
part of the ceremony. I am so hungry I could eat anything," remarked
George, as they neared the village.

"The natives do not think so. That is part of the ceremony. It must be
carried out before a meal is taken," answered John, "or it will not have
the proper effect."

Uraso overheard the remark, and he added: "The Chief said they had never
known such a scene as took place to-day, and that it was not a part of
the regular ceremony to have the dancing at that time, but that the
wonderful music seemed to win every one."

"I heard him say it was the first time in years that he had danced. How
he enjoyed it," remarked Muro. "I admit that it was the best dance I had
since the boys got back. That was a big time at Unity when you
returned."

"I think," said Harry, "that was the queerest performance I ever heard
of. What a foolish thing to cut a flower from the top of a tree, and go
through all that ceremony, using Old Fantastic with his flourishing
spear to conduct the ridiculous rites."

"Do you think it is any more foolish than many things which civilized
people do?" asked John.

Harry mused a while, and then continued: "Probably not, when I think of
it, but with us the ceremonies really mean something; at least, it seems
to me that they are intended to."

"Yes, and that is generally so with the native rites. Sometimes the
origin is rather obscure, but everything of this character comes from
something in the past, of which it is symbolic. Spencer, in his work on
'Evolutions of Ceremonial Forms of Government,' recites a curious
instance of this, where he shows that the habit of stroking the mustache
is a survival of scalping."

The boys laughed. "That must be pretty well far-fetched," responded
George.

"Do you think so?" answered John. "He reasons it in this way. It was,
formerly the custom, among most savage tribes, to take the hair of
victims, to be used as personal adornment, or to indicate the valor of
the warrior. Among some tribes in the Philippines and also in the
interior of Africa, the custom is to take the head of an enemy."

"Do you mean the Head hunters?"

"Yes; you have probably heard a great deal about them since we acquired
the Philippines. When men began to get a little higher in the scale of
civilization, the victor required some token of submission from the
conquered, so the latter plucked a wisp of hair from his head and
presented it to indicate defeat. During the seventeenth century it was
the rule of the Spanish Court that all inferiors, in addressing
superiors, must stroke the mustache, and this came from the old idea of
the hair token."

"Do you suppose that the taking of the flower has any particular
significance?"

"Most assuredly! There must be a flower before there can be fruit. This
is the beginning of the season or the beginning of the year, to these
people, and the largest-flower, at the top of the greatest tree is the
one taken while it is at full bloom, and incinerated."

[Illustration: _Fig. 7. The Mistletoe._]

"Is that what they did in that bowl-shaped vessel?"

"Yes, and I imagine they will use the ashes in some part of their
rites."

"Did you ever know of other tribes that do anything like that?"

"Yes; very many; in fact most savage tribes have some sort of rites
which they scrupulously follow out as a religious duty. Ancient history
records many such practices in detail. Thus, the Druids, a peculiar
class, or order of priests, which existed among the Celtic races,
attributed a sacred or mystic character to plants, and venerated the oak
tree."

"I have read that they offered up human sacrifices," said Harry.

"Yes; I was coming to that. But do you know that they regarded the
mistletoe as an antidote for all poisons and a cure for all diseases? At
certain seasons in the year it would be gathered, and with the greatest
ceremonies one of the priests would ascend the tree on which it was
found, and cut it off with a golden knife."

"But is the mistletoe found on the Oak?"

"Yes; but it grows more frequently on the Apple tree. The seeds are
distributed by birds, and owing to the fact that it is found so
infrequently on the oak, the Druids considered it peculiarly sacred on
that account."

       *       *       *       *       *

The delicious odor of the roasted food, which met the people on their
return, was a compensation for the lack of the morning breakfast. The
Chief had invited John, Uraso, Muro, the two boys, and Stut, to
accompany him to his home.

There in the open court, if it might so be called, were the viands in
the greatest profusion. They were surprised to see that at each place
was a couch, and before every visitor was laid a bountiful supply of
food. In all their wanderings George and Harry never ate with a greater
relish than on the present occasion.

The meal the previous day, was not at all comparable to this. It would
have vied with many a meal set before our civilized gastronomies. The
table implements, it is true, were not found in profusion, but the
wooden forks, or prongs were good substitutes for the more refined
articles, and for plates hollowed bark sections were found serviceable.

The Sarsaparilla drink was the most favored liquid. "I wish we had some
ice for it," suggested Harry. "It will be a good thing to bring over
some ice for the Chief. I think he would enjoy it."

"By the way, Harry, did you see what they did with the Korinos?"

"No."

"Shut them up in that dark hole back of the house."

"I wonder if they have given them anything to eat?"

"Oh, no!" said Muro. "They are to be sacrificed this afternoon, and it
wouldn't do to feed them."

"Poor fellows!" remarked George, as he gazed vacantly before him, lost
in contemplation.

"Well, they have been found out, and will now be dealt with in
accordance with their law."

"Was that tall fellow one of them?"

"Yes; he is the principal chief of the Korinos. Do you know they tried
to escape last night?" exclaimed Uraso.

"Is that so? Where could they go in safety on this island?"

"To their caves, of course," remarked Harry.

"Yes," added Uraso, "the Chief has no authority under ground."

The people gorged; so did the Chief. The meal was a course dinner, at
least so far as the time it took to get through with all the dishes, and
the boys smiled as they saw the Chief slowly sink down, and pass off
into oblivion.

John sat there, gazing on him, and slowly nodding his head at the
spectacle. He did not evince disgust, and when George spoke to him about
this peculiar savage trait, he remarked: "Is he any worse than many
people in our own country, who do the same thing? This is not gluttony
with the savage; he knows no better. This is one of the great enjoyments
of life which the savage knows. Teach him something better and he will
respond."

"When you stop to think of it," replied George, "I really don't see why
it is such an awful thing to eat until you are stuffed to sleepiness?"

"The real argument against it is on sanitary grounds," suggested John.
"We regard gluttony as bad because it is a selfish exhibition of taste
and habits, and in this I quite agree; but among savages the custom of
regularity in habits is not one of their understood laws. I have known
North American Indians who could each devour from six to eight pounds of
beef, and drink two quarts of coffee at one sitting. But those men would
not eat another meal for three days."

During the meal hour there was a continual round of merriment, and every
one was enjoying himself to the fullest extent. But now the hum of
voices ended. The boys were surprised.

"They are taking their noon-day siestas," said John, laughing.

The boys arose and passed out. It was true, indeed. The men, and women
too, were taking naps everywhere, the grotesque figures lying where they
had eaten their food.

[Illustration: _Fig. 8. The Jacchus._]

They made a tour. No one appeared to take any notice of them, as they
passed through the open places between the huts, because all of the food
was eaten in the open, and not within the huts. The village looked like
one immense picnic ground.

As they were returning toward the Chief's house they caught sight of the
hut in which the Korinos were confined. To their astonishment two of
them were crawling out the enclosure, and the leader was particularly
noticeable, peering from the side of the hut.

"Shall we give the alarm?" asked Harry.

"No, no! See John; he will know what to do."

As they passed the hut the guards lay in blissful sleep, and seeing this
the boys rushed in and excitedly told John of the jail delivery and the
advisability of giving the alarm.

He held up his hand, in caution, as he smiled at the announcement. "Do
you want the poor fellows to be sacrificed?"

"By no means."

"Then let them go. Possibly the Chief may find some way to get them
back."

Two hours later the village took on another aspect. It was now about
five o'clock in the afternoon, but in the meantime boy-like they had
investigated every part of the surrounding scenery, being particularly
interested in the monkeys which were seen in the trees everywhere.

The most amusing to the boys was a small animal that had a "beard all
around his face," as George expressed it. It was small, hardly exceeding
a foot in height, a sort of olive-gray color, and a round tail twice the
length of the body.

"I think I know what you have reference to," suggested John, when
appealed to. "It is the Jacchus, and is related to the Marmozets and the
Tamarins. They are very active, like squirrels, and live on nuts, seeds,
roots and fruit."

The Chief awakened as the boys entered, and within the next half hour
was ready for the continuance of the festival.

"I should like to know what the next thing is on the programme? This is
a little inconvenient, not knowing just what is going to take place,"
was George's observation.

"John will know if any one does, but I suppose he is too busy now with
his Royal Highness," answered Harry with a laugh.

But the boys were not kept long in suspense. The natives understood, as
it appeared, for they were soon congregated around the Palace, and now
for the first time the boys noticed a large, imposing-looking native,
who carried an immense knotted club. To satisfy the reader's curiosity,
it may be well to describe him. He wore a loin cloth, made of the skins
of the small animals which were found all over the island, and, to all
appearances, at least a half dozen different kinds of pelts were used to
make up the garment, the ends, or corners of which hung down in points
to form a fringe.

At his ankles were two huge bands, made of cloth, and plentifully
decorated with spangles of shells, and rows of nuts, strung on cords,
like beads. Around his neck and trailing down the back was a collar of
interwoven leaves, very artistically arranged, if judged from the
viewpoint of savage decorations.

The head dress was unique, being made up of a band of coarsely-woven
cloth, literally covered with large fish scales, and a pyramidal
structure was fastened to this band, and extended up beyond the crown
for a foot, or more. At its apex was a mass of streamers, which
fluttered around as the breeze floated by.

The weapon was fully five feet long, the head of the club, for such it
was, terminated in a gnarled knot, bristling with small points. This
the boys recognized to be somewhat similar to the wicked thing that was
carried by the Korino when he sought to slay Tarra.

The Chief was also differently attired. He was literally covered with
clothing, the different parts being dyed with various colors without any
regard to harmony, or design. Like all the others he wore no foot
covering, but had bare feet.

The crown was also a cloth band, but this was surrounded by
vertically-arranged thorns, huge things that showed their bristling
points, and wound, or rather braided around them, were garlands of human
hair, of different hues.

The Royal wand was an immense black staff, fully two inches thick, and
six feet long, one end of which was pointed, the other end terminating
within a large calabash. This wand he held with the pointed end upward.

When he appeared at the doorway the people fell down on their faces, and
after a few words all arose, and the man with the club turned toward the
hut where the Korinos were confined. Four of the largest warriors
accompanied him, while the people looked on in expectancy.

"The fun will now begin," whispered Harry, and it surely did. The club
bearer returned with a troubled look, and addressed the Chief.

The people soon learned of what had taken place, and the commotion was
evident. They speedily lost all semblance of order, and began to run to
and fro. The scowl on the face of the Chief was terrible, nor did he in
the least attempt to conceal his anger.

With a vehemence that caused the crowd to shiver, he gave a command, and
in a moment three men were brought forward, almost in a state of
collapse with terror written in their countenances. They were the
unfortunate guards, as the boys quickly saw.

They were unable to answer the indictment of the Chief, because the
escape had been as much of a surprise to them as to the Chief. Uraso and
Muro were quick to recognize the situation, and they informed John of
the progress of the conversation.

The negligent guards had been condemned to take the places of the
Korinos, as sacrifices. The rites demanded some victims, and the boys
now saw that the escape of the Korinos would not avoid the carrying out
of the bloody rites.

The new, victims-to-be were firmly bound, and placed in the center of
the crowd, and, strangely enough, it was now noticed that the people
expressed the same degree of hatred to the poor unfortunates that they
had manifested toward the Korinos an hour before.

The Chief was now at the head of the procession, which, instead of going
to the north, passed alongside the slight elevation that led north of
the grove, and toward the high elevation which the boys had noticed the
day before.

The march was but a short one, and when the upper level was reached the
boys were astounded to see that beyond, and next to the hill, on the
north, was an open space, the floor of which was of solid rock. This
space covered nearly an acre, and near the center was a flat rocky
table, fully ten feet in diameter and about four feet high, with a huge
boulder in the center of the table.

The Chief and the victims marched directly to the stone table, the
executioner tramping with a measured tread immediately ahead of the
victims. The people did not go near the rocky shelf, but circled about
at a respectful distance.




CHAPTER VIII

HYPNOTISM ON SAVAGES


All those with the Chief's party, approached the table, upon which the
executioner mounted the rock, and stood there, as though inviting the
admiration of the crowd.

John spoke a few words to Uraso, and the latter addressed the Chief as
follows: "The White Chief says that to offer these men as a sacrifice
will be against the wishes of the Great Spirit, if they are destroyed by
the weapon which is now in the hands of the one on the rock."

The Chief quickly turned. "What would the White Chief have me do? I
cannot free these culprits, because it is the law that they shall die in
place of those who are appointed to be the victims."

"The White Chief does not ask for their lives, but only that the manner
of their death shall be changed."

"That shall be done. What is the White Chief's wish?"

"He will be the executioner."

The Chief threw his arms around Uraso's neck, in raptures of joy, and
turning to the man on the table, ordered him to descend. John quietly
conferred with Uraso, and the latter mounted the table, and the
prisoners were led up until they faced him.

Uraso, addressing them, said: "You have been condemned by your Chief to
die because you have deceived his people and brought sorrow on all. The
Great White Chief has seen the misery you have caused by allowing the
Korinos to escape, and you must now take their places as the victims to
appease the Great Spirit.

"The White Chief has asked to be permitted to offer you up as sacrifices
to his God, as well, and the White Man's death is a terrible one. When
you die it will not cause you to go out of the world forgetting all that
you may suffer, but you will always know and suffer through all time,
and you will never know a day that is free from misery.

"Your dying will be like a thousand deaths, and your living hours will
be like fire that always burns and never consumes."

Thus Uraso went on, and as he spoke the poor victims' eyes grew greater
and greater, and the terror more pronounced. He ceased for a moment and
John slowly walked to the table, and mounting it, said quietly to Uraso:
"Tell them that when I raise my hands over my head the ends of their
living death will begin."

When this was imparted, the agony on their faces was pitiful to see.
John advanced, and spread out his palms toward them, and quickly drew
his hands toward him, and this was repeated three times.

It is a curious thing that most savages believe in the mysticism of some
particular number. In Africa some tribes, if they hear an animal cry
four times, will brave any danger, as it is a sign that the bird has
knowledge of safety to his person.

Others watch with great care the repetition of an insect's call, and
particularly the number of times an unusual noise occurs, and the belief
is somewhat analogous to the views which white people have about the
cricket. Milton, Byron, Southey, and Dickens have written stories about
them, so it is not to be wondered at that the poor benighted savages
should have some belief about such things.

After the rites at the tree in the forest, it was evident that three was
the cryptic, or mysterious number, and John used it on this occasion,
for in all the peculiar signs that he had previously employed, three was
the number that impressed itself on the minds of the people, and it
doubtless had its effect on the condemned.

Slowly John moved from side to side, and he now saw the intense
expression, as their eyes followed his every motion. His motions grew
less and less rapid; he moved toward them, and then suddenly retreated,
and through all these evolutions the three men's faces became more and
more tense, and finally the muscles of their faces relaxed, their eyes
stared with a blank expression, and the motions of John almost ceased.

The boys looked about them. They, too, had a spell woven about them
which they could not understand. It was the most remarkable feeling they
had ever experienced. The multitude did not stir a limb. The Chief was
rigid, his face colorless, lips parted, and eyes fixed at what he saw
before him.

Suddenly, John sprang forward, and raised both arms high above his head,
and instantly the three men fell back and lay rigid, full length on the
rock. John turned, but while there were forms before him, there was no
sound. Hundreds of eyes gazed, but they stared mutely.

"I feel awfully funny," said Harry.

"Do you know what John has been doing?" asked George.

"I know; he has hypnotized the men!"

"Yes; and everybody else!"

When John turned, he waved his hand, the audience relaxed its tension,
and witnessed the death (?) of the three men, an act performed by the
White Chief without having touched them. The Chief slowly walked
forward, and Uraso led him to the platform, while John pointed to the
mute victims.

John motioned to Uraso to raise the first man by lifting his feet while
he grasped the shoulders, and when the body was lifted up it was
perfectly rigid. The same exhibition was performed with the two others.
That they were dead, was apparent to the Chief and the people.

The people surged to and fro. John was a Korino now, in the eyes of the
people. When the people pressed forward John spoke to Uraso, and he
turned to the people.

"The White Chief says that there will be no more sacrifices, because the
Great Spirit wills it otherwise. The Korinos must be brought from the
caves--"

Uraso could get no further. The people were aroused. Their voices could
be heard uttering threats against the witch doctors.

John saw that they were determined to wreak vengeance upon them, but he
counseled them to be wise and obey their Chief, and that the Korinos
would acknowledge their own error.

The wives and children of the three guards were present, as they were
compelled to be, and, as may well be imagined, their grief was terrible
to behold.

Uraso again spoke to the people, and said: "The White Chief intends to
show that the Great Spirit does not wish sacrifices, and will give back
the guards to their families."

When he ceased speaking John stooped forward, and waved his hands three
times, the motion being formed by throwing his hands forward, palms
downward, and then slowly raising them up, and with an upward and an
outward swing, bringing them down again.

Then he advanced forward a few feet and held out his arms horizontally,
with the palms uppermost, and speaking a few words, the arms were
impressively raised. As he did so the three men slightly turned, and
then almost simultaneously raised themselves to a sitting posture, and
glanced about wildly.

The consternation on the part of the natives at this sight was beyond
all description. They were awe stricken, and dumbfounded. Not the
slightest sound could be heard, as the men arose to their feet.

The only ones who were joyously affected were the wives of the men who,
at the words of Uraso, sprang forward and were about to ascend the rock,
but at the command of John they leaped from the table, and the children
gathered about them.

The Chief did not utter a word of protest. He remained there utterly
speechless. When John asked him what was the next thing to be done to
carry out the rites, he remained standing for some time without
answering.

When he had gathered together his faculties he turned to the people and
said: "The Great White Chief has shown his power, and proven to us that
our Korinos have lied to us. They must be destroyed. Let the people
return to the village, and proceed with the feast. We shall be guided by
the White Chief."

This was, indeed, the effect that John wished to produce, but he did not
also anticipate that the Chief would insist upon the destruction of the
Korinos.

The feast that afternoon was a repetition on a larger scale, of the
feast of the day before. Indeed, this was now the third day of feasting.

"I don't know whether I can eat any more for a few days," said Harry, as
they neared the village, and saw the preparations going on.

George laughed, as he responded: "We shall have to go through with this
thing, whatever the cost. Have you forgotten that they believe in
_three_ for everything? Didn't John make three passes to kill them; and
three more to bring them to life again? We have had two feasts, and must
now have one more. I don't know what the result will be if I eat half as
much even, as I did yesterday."

John laughed heartily, as he added: "That is correct, too, about the
feasts. Notice from this time on that about everything they do will be
measured by threes."

As the boys afterwards remarked, they never knew how they got through
the feast that day, but they tried to imitate John in partaking of the
good things in moderation.

It was late in the night when the natives ceased the dancing, which was
the signal for the end of the festival, although in many respects it was
entirely different from the previous ceremonies, as Uraso and Muro
learned in talking with the natives.

The next day was ushered in with a rainstorm, the first that was
experienced on the island, and there was no opportunity to make any
excursions. It had been John's intention to settle the fate of the
Korinos, as he felt that this was a matter that should have his
attention before they left on the further explorations of the island.

Since it was impossible to venture out far from the village, John spent
the most of the day attending to the wounded and the sick, although they
had not been neglected in the meantime, not even during the ceremonies
of the past three days.

The first visit was made to the quarters of the white man who was found
in the stockade when they took possession of the village. It was evident
from the greeting that he and John had had several conversations
previous to this visit, but of this the latter did not advise the boys.

When they came into the room he was sitting up, and he greeted John and
the boys. He could speak, but it was with a weak voice, and the boys
ranged themselves on one side while John seated himself on the other.

"You told me yesterday," began John, "that when you were shipwrecked you
were cast ashore on another island. How many companions had you?"

"Three," he answered. "One of them was a large man, with brown hair and
piercing eyes, who was formerly an officer in the navy, and was at that
time engaged in an exploring capacity, and on his way to Australia."

"Did he walk with a limp?" asked John.

The old man, as well as the boys, looked at John in surprise. He quickly
answered: "Yes; did you know him?"

"No," he replied; "but we found him less than a month ago."

The old man leaned forward in his eagerness. "Where is he?" he asked.

"He is dead," answered John, gravely.

"Dead!" he exclaimed. "Dead! and do you know his name?"

"No, but we found his remains, together with the boat to which he had
been tied, on the shore of an island south of this."

"Then it is true, after all!" he muttered.

"Did you know about it?" asked John, who was the interested one now.

"No, this is sad news to me. His name was Clifford,--Ralph S. Clifford,
and when he and Walter undertook,--"

The boys were all impatience now, as George cried out: "Walter! did you
know Walter?"

"Yes; he was my companion for a time. He and I were making explorations
on the island on which we were wrecked, and when the two undertook to go
on a search, to ascertain what the island was like, I was too ill to go
with them. Walter returned, and told me of meeting with a band of
savages on the western side of the mountain, and of the capture of
Clifford by the natives."

"Did you know a man by the name of Wright?"

"No, I never heard of any one by that name in this section of the
globe."

"Do you know what became of Walter?"

"I was about to say, that we went north along the shore, and camped near
the beach, and there found a boat, rather crudely made, with which we
proposed sailing around the island. Before we could complete our
arrangements, Walter disappeared."

"Did he take the boat with him?"

"No; the boat and all his effects were still with me. I was still very
ill, and I concluded to remain there until my strength returned, but
four days afterwards, when I was able to move about, I found that the
boat had disappeared."

The strain of the conversation appeared to affect him, and the three
visitors stated they would call on him later for further information.

When the boys returned to their huts, with John, the latter was quiet
and very much reserved. The boys were so much interested in the story of
the old man, that they could not wait until they were seated before they
began to question him.

"What do you think of his story?" asked Harry.

John did not answer promptly, as was his habit. Instead, he reflected
for some time, and at last said slowly: "The story may be true. Clifford
was, in my opinion, tied to the boat and set adrift, and his death was
due to that, unquestionably."

"Do you think this man had anything to do with it?" asked George.

"So far, I have no direct reason for thinking so, but there are several
very curious things about the story."

"What in particular do you have in mind?"

"He said the boat was found on the seashore, and that Walter left
without taking it with him, but that when he recovered the boat was
gone."

"Is it an unreasonable story?"

"That is not at all improbable. The tide might have washed it away, but,
if it was our boat, and it was provided with the peculiar rope and the
strange oars, that were found in it when it was recovered by you, it
would be interesting to know whether he or Walter put them there."

"Why is that so interesting to know?"

"Because the rope found in that boat, is the same as the rope we took
from Clifford's body, which you discovered on Venture Island."

"If we could only find Walter now it would solve that mystery," said
Harry. "I don't like to think that this man was instrumental in the
Clifford tragedy."

"Nor do I," responded John. "It is evident there is some connection
between that boat and the skeleton, and that our boat played a part in
it." This ended the conversation on this point.

It will be remembered that two of the men rescued from the prison
stockade, were natives of another tribe, who had been captured some
weeks before. Upon inquiry John found that they had disappeared the day
before.

The two others, in a very emaciated condition, were still under John's
care, and rapidly improving. No attempts had been made to question
them, and as it was the intention of the boys to commence the trip to
the north, as soon as John had settled the matter with the Korinos, they
were anxious to get some information from them concerning their tribe.

Accompanying Uraso, and through him, they first learned that the people
they were now living with were called Malosos, and that the Chief was
named Ta Babeda, which meant the _strong man_. He was not so large as
Beralsea, the Chief of Venture Island, but his muscles were more active,
thus the boys could see that he rightly acquired the sceptre of chief
ruler, as did Beralsea, because of the strength he possessed, and there
was no one on the island to question his king-ship.

While rambling about the boys and Uraso were informed that John wished
to see them at the Chief's house, and they went over without delay.
Entering the house, they were surprised to see that the different
packages containing the presents had been opened, and were about to be
distributed.

The Chief and his household were first provided for. The articles
consisted of coats, and different articles of wear for the Chief,
together with a watch, a revolver, and a camera.

"This will give both of you boys an opportunity to give the Chief some
lessons in these instruments," said John.

The articles for the women were received with screams of delight that
pleased the Chief beyond measure. Bits of lace, the like of which had
never been seen on the island, cotton fabric, beads, articles of
ornamentation, and finally full-fledged dresses, were only parts of the
gifts which went to the women and children.

"With your permission," said John, to the Chief, "I will offer gifts to
your people, and you may state that during the afternoon the articles
will be arranged in packages so that all will receive presents of like
value."

The boys, as well as Uraso and Muro, were busy making up the gifts for
distribution. During the remaining portion of the day they were busily
engaged in this work, which brought the greatest joy and happiness to
the natives.

It may well be imagined that Uraso and Muro were not slow in imparting
the news of Wonder Island to the natives. John had a long conference
with the Chief on the same subject.

"But how can we get these articles?" he asked, as John told him how they
made the wonderful things.

"You can make them here," he answered.

"But we cannot make them if we do not have the tools."

"Then you can buy them," responded John.

"But what have we that you want?" he asked, as he eagerly scanned John's
face.

"Your land is full of things that the people in Wonder Island want, and
the whole world will buy them of you."

"Will you tell me what they want and how we shall get them ready for
you?"

"It will give us pleasure to send our people over who can tell you what
spices, and nuts, and coffee, and other things which you have in
abundance, can be prepared, and what they are worth, and it will be the
means of giving the people work, and peace and contentment."

"But if we do not have any more fighting with our enemy there will be no
need of a strong Chief," he remarked, thinking of his new relation to
the scheme as outlined.

"There will be a much greater need of a strong man like you, who can
mete out equal justice to the people," remarked John.




CHAPTER IX

THE REMARKABLE CAVE EXPLORATIONS


But the time was now at hand, when it became necessary for the exploring
expedition to the north. The rescued prisoners stated that their people,
while not so numerous, were very warlike, and by degrees, John learned
that they were the cannibals of whom they had heard.

The tribe was known as the Umbolos, and the Chief was a frightful man,
unlike any other in the tribe, or, at any rate, from the description, he
was not formed like them. He was known as Rumisses, which in their
tongue meant _thunder_.

It was remarkable that Uraso and Muro understood most of the words of
the language used by the natives here and also on Venture Island. On
Wonder Island, there were only two tongues, or dialects, and the people
on this island, as well as on Venture Island, spoke the dialect
belonging to the Illyas, Kurabus and the Tuolos, the tribes that were
the fiercest and the most difficult to subdue.

It was hoped that the escape of the two Umbolos, and the return to their
people would be sufficient to give them the entree to that part of the
country, but after the questionings of John on this point, it was very
doubtful whether this would impress itself on their minds.

The natives had been accustomed for so long a period to regard every
other people as an enemy, and consequently absolutely removed from any
possibility of friendship, that it was questionable whether the
messengers could persuade the Chief to receive them.

Arrangements for the departure were decided upon, and they planned to
start early in the morning. John visited the Chief, and suggested that
he should consider it a favor if the Chief would permit him to take the
Korinos with him.

The Chief opened his eyes in astonishment. "Why do you wish to be
burdened with men who will live by deceiving?" he inquired.

"But they have lived to the best of their knowledge. They do not know
any better. They believe what they have been taught, and think it is a
duty to carry out and practice their rites. They do not wish to deceive
you."

The Chief pondered for a long time, and then replied: "What will you do
with them?"

"I want to teach them the white man's ways, and tell them to come back
and teach your children the things which we believe are right and for
the good of the people."

The lessons which John imparted were sources of wonder and amazement to
the ruler, who, five days before, thought he was the only one appointed
to make and to execute laws.

When he finally gave his consent, he said: "You must take it upon
yourself to get the Korinos, because they will not come out of their
caves."

"But how can they find food there? If you prevent them from getting
food they will be compelled to come out or starve."

"They will starve before they will permit themselves to be taken."

"Then," answered John, "why do you not order your warriors to enter the
cave and take them by force?"

"But who dares to go in?"

"I dare to go in, but you must order me to do so," answered John.

The Chief jumped up in an instant. "And will you go?" he asked in the
greatest delight.

"By all means. You must go with me to the cave, and there command me to
enter and bring them forth."

The Chief's eyes danced with delight, and he could hardly await the hour
for starting on the mission.

The boys and the two companion chiefs, were in their glory upon hearing
of the decision to get the Korinos. Before leaving the Chief John
questioned him very closely on the location of the cave, and whether
there were not other caves on the island to the north.

"I have heard that there is another one to the north, that was used in
olden times by the Korinos who lived when my father was Chief. I also
know that far to the north where the false and treacherous Umbolos live,
are great caves which no man may enter."

"Do they have Korinos in the Umbolo tribe?"

"No; they do not believe in a Great Spirit."

"Then, if they have no Korinos, why do they not dare to enter the
caverns?"

"Because they have been told that it is death to go into the dark."

"Do you know why they think so?"

"Because, a long time ago, the only man who ever returned from the dark
caves, brought out the bones of men who had died there."

"But it did not kill that man who brought them out?"

"Yes; he died. And now no one dares enter those places."

It may be imagined how this intelligence stirred up the boys. It was
impossible to keep them from talking about it. To John it was like a
magic wand; it seemed to wave before his eyes and to talk to him. What
if they had really found the great cave on which John's heart was so
keenly bent?

But the Korinos must be freed. That afternoon, just before starting, the
boys were surprised to see the band coming up the street. How they
laughed, as they scented John's little ruse. It would, indeed, be a
treat to bring the Korinos out of their dark resorts to some good old
marching tune.

The band struck up a familiar air, and to its lively tones the
procession, with the three Chiefs and John at the head, marched across
the open, and up the hill past the grove, on its way to the cave on the
eastern slope of the high hill which rose from the shore of the ocean.

There was jest and laughter, the Chief enjoying the treat that would be
the greatest pleasure of his life, namely, the bringing of the Korinos
out of the cave.

After ascending the great hill, so that they overlooked the ocean, the
Chief informed John that the entrance was a third of the way down the
hill, and the narrow path was followed which led around to the north,
shutting out the sight of the sea.

After a few hundred feet, the path led to a cleft portion of the rocks,
where the light of the sun was completely hidden. The walls of the
rocks, at the entrance of the cleft portion, were fully fifty feet high,
and were at least twenty feet apart, but as they went on the walls drew
nearer together and the path ascended a slight incline.

A sharp turn was reached, and they found themselves in a little cove, to
the left of which was a dark entrance, toward which the Chief nodded, as
he shrank back.

John motioned to the Chief, and the latter sternly commanded John to
bring forth the Korinos. John said a few words to Uraso and Muro, and
also invited the boys to accompany them.

"I suppose you are all armed?" said John.

The boys and the chiefs had come well prepared, so this point was taken
care of.

"But where are the lights?" asked George.

"I have them," said John, "but we shall not use them now, for reasons
which will be explained later." Together they entered the cave, the
darkness of which was appalling. After going in fully a hundred and
fifty feet, John stopped and said: "It would have been a sign of
weakness to go in with a light. When we have gone far enough to be free
from the mouth of the cave, we can use our flash lights. For the present
we shall move on to ascertain whether the Korinos are provided with
lights, which will show where they are, and we may thus be guided to
them."

The distance traveled must have been fully a thousand feet, when John
again spoke: "I shall now throw the light directly ahead, and you must
keep your eyes open to detect anything moving."

The light flashed, and was then moved slowly to the left, until it
reached a cove at the extreme eastern side, where there was an evident
assemblage of articles, not a hundred feet in advance of them, but there
was not a sign of living beings within the scope of the light beams.

The company moved over to the spot indicated. A moment's examination
satisfied them that it was really the abode of the Korinos, but they had
disappeared.

The debris, the half eaten portions of food, some still warm, were
sufficient to indicate that they had fled, but where? Uraso, Muro and
John, all three, flashed their lights, and, after examining the walls
critically, Muro was the first to find the opening from the chamber in
which they were standing.

The outlet from the chamber was to the north, and toward it the
explorers ran hurriedly, and passed along the contracted path, which
soon turned to the left. After following its many windings, and
scrambling over the broken and rocky floor, they saw ahead a streak of
daylight, which gladdened the hearts of the boys.

"Ah! they have gone," exclaimed John, as he emerged, and glanced across
the ravine, and along the walls which extended up from the shore of a
little stream below. "They have gone to the north, and have, probably,
tried to seek safety in the other cave."

"How are we going to get back?" asked George.

"Do you think there will be any trouble in that?" asked John.

"We shall have to go clear over the mountain for that, I'm afraid."

[Illustration: _Fig. 9. The Cave on Rescue Island._]

"We are not far from the entrance," said John, "and if we intend to
catch up with the Korinos, we must not delay for a moment."

The party made a hurried trip around the hill, and the Chief was
surprised to learn that there was another entrance, or an outlet to the
cave on the northern side. None of his warriors was aware of this,
however.

John was now in a quandary. He was exceedingly anxious to secure the
Korinos, but at the same time there was some things in the appearance of
the cave that he wished to investigate. This was confided to Uraso and
Muro, and the latter suggested that he and Uraso would undertake to
follow the fleeing men, and return to the village, while John and the
boys made the desired investigation.

This was readily assented to, and they at once made their way across the
hill, while John informed the Chief of the action which they had decided
to take. One of the principal men of the village, in whom the Chief had
confidence, and who knew the location of the upper caves, accompanied
Uraso and Muro.

The Chief, and those with him returned to the village, while John
remained behind under the pretense that he wished to stay at the cave
entrance until they returned from the pursuit after the Korinos.

The boys first secured the flash lights which the two chiefs had
brought, and when all had departed the boys and John entered the cave
and marched directly to the location of their interior home.

Every part of the habitation was well investigated. Almost every kind of
tool and implement was found here in profusion, but singularly, none of
them appeared to be used. Several flint lock guns, all rusted, and with
decayed stocks, were among the articles discovered, but the Korinos had
not used them.

The inevitable copper vessels, entirely unlike those of modern
manufacture, were the first things to claim the attention of the boys,
as they recalled similar articles found in the caves thitherto
investigated by them.

"This begins to look as though we are to have the same experience we had
at the cave at the Cataract," said George. "These vessels, no doubt,
were brought here by the buccaneers, and I'll be surprised if we don't
find a few more of their belongings somewhere in this place."

After all the recesses in this vicinity had been investigated they
scanned the side walls to the right, carefully going into the little
recesses which were found all along the jagged sides.

A hundred feet south of the living part of the cave they came,
unexpectedly upon a large extension, not noticed before in their pursuit
of the Korinos. The chamber extended in a southerly direction, and
narrowed at the extreme opposite end.

"This has the appearance of leading to another outlet, which would take
us to the southern side of the hill. It would be remarkable, indeed, if
such should be the case," said John, as he eagerly pressed forward,
until they had passed four chambers.

The walls were coming closer and closer, until there was now barely room
for them to pass through, but they went in unhesitatingly, John in the
lead. The passage was not straight, so that the light did not aid much
in looking ahead, but suddenly the flash threw a beam ahead, which
showed that they were at the entrance of a chamber.

John stopped and directed the search light to all parts of the cavern.
It appeared to be nearly round, with a perfectly smooth floor. It was
unoccupied, but in the exact center of the chamber was a raised object,
like a mound.

Throughout the entire cave could be found the calcareous deposit so
common in caves formed in limestone rocks, and the stalactite hangings
on the ceilings and walls, and the stalagmites on the floors made the
scene a weird one.

John glanced upwardly to view the ceiling, above the mound, and said:
"That does not seem to be a natural formation. Let us examine it first."

With the small pick which John always carried, and by means of which he
was always careful to examine rocks and geological formations, while on
these tours, the top parts of the stalagmites were chipped off. This was
an exceedingly simple matter, since they are generally soft.

After the top layer was removed, the part beneath readily yielded, but
before they had an opportunity to dig into it very deeply the pick
struck something which gave forth a metallic sound. John stopped as
though paralyzed.

The pick was again driven in. Again the plain contact with some hard
substance. The digging was now feverish, and when the broken parts were
cleared away, a small metallic box, about twelve inches square across
the top, and about ten inches deep, was exposed to view.

The dent made by the pick was clearly visible, and the fresh mark showed
that the metal was red.

"It is copper!" said John.

Every part of the material around the box was removed, and this enabled
them to remove it from its resting place. John grasped it and securing a
good hold, finally raised it.

"No, it is not any heavier than I thought it would he," he remarked as
he lay it down.

"Did you expect to find this?" asked George in amazement.

"No; this is a surprise to me as it is to you."

"Then why did you make that remark?"

"Because I believe that this box contains treasure of untold value. I
should have been surprised if it weighed very much."

"Could it not have contained treasure if it had been heavy?" asked
Harry.

John laughed, a peculiar exultant chuckle, as he responded: "Not the
kind of treasure I have had in contemplation."

The box was turned over and over. There was not the sign of any lid, or
crack which showed the cover or means of opening it. "We must take this
out and open it at our leisure," remarked John, "but before doing so it
would be well to examine the other outlets to this chamber, if it has
any."

The chamber was found, on measurement, to be thirty feet in diameter,
and the vaulted ceiling fully thirty feet high, singularly uniform in
the domed formation, and not rough or jagged like the ceiling of the
other chamber which they had just left.

The walls were absolutely solid on all sides, the only entrance being by
way of the narrow little passageway through which they had come. Harry
picked up the box, and swung it up to his shoulder, and, John leading
the way, they filed out and passed through the chamber, quickly making
their way to the opening through which they first entered the cave.

Within an hour they were back in the village, and found Muro there
awaiting their arrival. "We have found their trail, and they have not
gone to the upper cave. They are heading straight for the tribe in the
northern end of the island."

"I am surprised at that," said John. "We must consult the Chief about
this," and without another word, he hurriedly went over to the Chief,
who was as much astounded as John could be at the peculiar significance
of their actions.




CHAPTER X

THE TRIBE TO THE NORTH


Instead of conveying the copper box to the village it was carried to the
landing place and taken to the vessel, where it could be examined later,
when they had more time. It was now of more importance to keep in touch
with Muro and Uraso, the former of whom had gone to the north as soon as
he had given the report mentioned in the last chapter.

On the return to the village they discussed the affairs of the previous
day, which John had abstained from mentioning.

"What is it that really makes the people act that way when they are
hypnotized!" asked George. "I have heard it said that there isn't any
truth in mesmerism."

"Mesmerism is the old term used to designate certain phenomena, which,
originally, was supposed to be a force that emanated from the mesmerist.
It is now known that hypnotism may be regarded as artificial catalepsy."

"But what is catalepsy?"

"It is an affection produced by hysteria, during which the patient's
body becomes rigid. It is claimed by some that somnambulism is one phase
of the hypnotic condition."

"But in what way do your motions act on the one who is being
hypnotized?"

"The motions have nothing whatever to do with producing the condition.
That is for effect, merely. Those who are able to bring about a mesmeric
condition, try to concentrate the mind on some particular thing, and by
making gentle motions, or passes, this is more forcibly impressed on
them."

"What was the object of Uraso telling them that the White Man's death
was a terrible one, and trying to frighten them?"

"Merely to make them concentrate their minds on one thing alone. Terror,
or great fear, is one of the things which tends to a cataleptic
condition. Great excitement, and sometimes excessive joy, have been
known to do the same thing."

"Then the object is merely to bring the mind under the control of the
operator?"

"Yes; what was originally considered as a power flowing from the
hypnotist, is nothing more than his mental action or control which
prevents the subject from exercising his own volition."

A few hours after they returned to the village Uraso and Muro returned,
with the information that the Korinos were now within the territory of
the tribe to the north, and they wisely concluded it would not be good
policy to pursue them further, and their prudence was commended by John.

The natives were supremely happy in displaying their gifts, and the
Chief, while much annoyed at the escape of the Korinos, was content to
be relieved of their presence, when, after numerous conversations with
John, he realized that they were of no use to him and his people.

John announced that he intended to visit the tribe to the north, and
purposed starting the following day. The Chief advised him to take with
him all the warriors in the village, because he felt sure they would
have a hostile reception.

"It seems to me," replied John, "that would be the wrong thing to do. I
do not wish him to think that my mission is a warlike one, and a large
force will be in the nature of an invasion of his territory."

"Perhaps you are right; but we have found him a difficult Chief to deal
with. He is not like a man. He cannot stand up straight, as we do, and
he kills and eats all who fall into his hands."

This information was regarded by John as one of the imagination, purely,
so it did not weigh heavily on his mind. What seemed to impress him most
was the fate of the poor fellows who had voluntarily sought the
protection of the cannibal Chief.

"I would like to have your opinion as to the course which the Chief will
take when the Korinos fall into his hands?" asked John.

The Chief mused for a while, and then said: "They have no Korinos and do
not believe in them, but they may tell the Chief that we tried to offer
them as sacrifices, and he may use them with his people to stir up
feelings of revenge against us."

"But," replied John, "the captives you took, and who have escaped may
tell him of our treatment of them and this may work in our favor."

"I do not think so," he replied. "We have had many instances where they
have refused to make friends with us, and for that reason we always had
war."

"But have you not often sacrificed their people when you have taken them
in your wars?"

"We have always done so."

"Have any of your captives ever returned to them?"

"No."

"And have they always killed and eaten your people when they captured
them?"

"Yes; and none has ever returned to us. The Korinos would not let us
keep the captives, but said that the Great Spirit told them they must be
sacrificed."

The foregoing information was sufficient to convince John of one thing,
namely, that it was really the spirit of the Korinos which kept up the
tribal warfare, at least so far as one end of the conflict was
concerned.

In spite of all the arguments advanced by the Chief, John was determined
to make the trip with his own people, and thus avoid any feeling on the
part of the tribe, against their present friend.

In the morning John called Stut, and advised him to wait until the
following day, when he should pull up anchor and proceed to the north
for a distance not exceeding twenty miles, and then, seeking a safe
anchorage, to await news from him.

With forty of his own trusted men, together with Uraso and Muro, they
set out on the march to the north, cheered by the people of the village,
who came out to witness their departure. The old man who had been
rescued, was still too weak to accompany them, so he was taken to the
vessel, where he could receive the best of care and attention.

In order not to be out of touch with the sea, John decided to follow the
hills along the eastern side of the island, and this course was selected
because the people to which they were going, unlike those at the
southern portion of the island, lived in the mountainous region, as
heretofore stated, and the probability of meeting them would be much
better than if they had followed the level plateau.

[Illustration: _Fig. 10. Cinnamon._]

In the march the boys, as well as John, were ever on the alert to
discover the possibilities of the island, so far as the natural products
were concerned.

"Something smells awfully sweet around here," said George, as they were
tramping along a beautifully-wooded crest.

"I think it must come from the trees that have the beautiful pale blue
flowers. Wait until I get a branch."

One of the men was quick to carry out Harry's wish. John was immensely
pleased at the interest which the boys exhibited. "What does it smell
like?" he inquired.

"Something like cloves and cinnamon, both," answered George.

"Peel off the bark and taste it."

"It is just like cinnamon."

"That is correct. It is the real cinnamon tree. It is the cassia of the
Bible, one of the spices so frequently referred to in Scripture. The
bark only is used, but the species which have fruit, are gathered and
oil expressed from them, which is called _cinnamon suet_."

Advancing, the surface became more rugged. They had to cross numerous
gullies, and broken portions, and frequently jagged rocks would show
themselves. Evidently when the island was raised up from the sea the
rocks were forced through, and the climate in time disintegrated them,
and formed a soil.

"Do you think we shall find any minerals here?" asked Harry.

"If we are to judge from our experiences on Wonder Island, where there
is almost exactly the same formation, we may reasonably expect to find
copper and also iron here."

"While Harry and I were over at the bluff with Uraso, we saw something
like green drippings, from the walls."

"That is, undoubtedly, copper,--that is the sulphate form, in which it
is usually found."

"I was amused at Laleo (the native guide), who told Uraso this morning
that our mission would be successful, and when he was asked why,
answered, that the first thing they saw was three black birds. How
superstitious these people are."

"Do you think they are any more so than civilized people?" answered
John. "It is curious how the number three runs through all their ideas.
In certain parts of England they have a great many omens, and one of
them is that if the traveler, starting on a journey, meets three
magpies, it means success; if two appears, it is a sign of marriage; and
four unexpected good news."

"I recall that it is considered lucky for sun to shine on a bride,"
added Harry.

"The other part of that couplet is 'rain on a corpse,'" remarked John.

"I never knew it was lucky for the corpse to be rained on," responded
Harry, in a questioning tone.

John laughed immoderately, as he answered: "Well, it might not be lucky
for the corpse. But there are numerous lucky and unlucky signs that no
one can account for, prevalent in our own country, such as putting on
stockings wrong side out, and finding a horseshoe."

"Of course, they are both fortunate signs," said George, smiling at the
thought.

"In Scotland, among those who are the most matter of fact people in the
world, signs are very common. It is a bad omen with them to stumble over
a threshold, or to step over green or red, or to sneeze while making up
a bed."

"After all, we are not so much ahead of the savages, are we?" mused
George.

During the march that day there was nothing specially worthy of note.
The animals they met were few and small, and it did not appear that
there were any which merited mentioning, so the boys gave up the idea of
meeting any adventure in that line.

Shortly after four in the afternoon they began to seek out some good
camping place. Laleo informed Uraso that they had now passed into the
territory claimed by the northern tribe, and the desirability of caution
was necessary.

A rocky shelter, only a short distance above a running brook below, was
found suitable, and there the halt was made for the night. Early in the
morning they were awakened by Muro, with the welcome intelligence that
the _Pioneer_ was sighted several miles to the north, where she lay at
anchor.

At the suggestion of John the boys went to the headland, a mile to the
east, and there hoisted a signal flag, which was observed by the vessel,
and the return signal given, this being indicated by four circular
sweeps of the flag.

Waving the flag twice to the right, and twice to the left indicated that
they were to remain there until further advised.

After a good breakfast the march was resumed, leading further to the
west to avoid the rugged hills near the sea. Either Uraso or Muro was
constantly in the lead, always accompanied by one of the men who, in
case of necessity, might be sent back to furnish John the reports of his
observations.

Before noon the messenger came in with the welcome information that the
first of the natives had been noticed, not far to the north. Muro, who
was in the lead, awaited the arrival of John and the boys.

Together they went forward, the men remaining in the camp. A few men
could thus move through the brush with less likelihood of observation,
than a large number, which was the principal reason for this mode of
procedure.

After another mile of cautious movement, a runner was sent back with the
order to bring all of them forward. Away in the distance the village was
sighted, George's field glasses now being brought into play. The huts
could be seen plainly along the mountain side, and scattered about in
profusion amid a plentiful supply of trees.

In some respects, viewed from a distance, the scene did not look at all
primitive, and were it not for the crude character of the houses it
might have been taken for a typical modern town or village.

Only one hut had been passed, thus far. It was not at all crudely built,
and while it had been left to decay, it showed that the owner had some
ideas of comfort, and an eye to convenience, as it was located by the
side of a spring. On one side of the cottage was a weed-grown garden,
and some fine specimens of taro as well as wild potatoes were in
evidence.

Earthenware cooking utensils were discovered, which added to the
interest of the place, but no other furniture was found to show how the
people lived. It might have been deserted for a year or more.

Ascending the second small hill, they were startled to find themselves
face to face with a half dozen of the natives, who were frightfully
alarmed at the appearance of the visitors, for they set up a shout and
ran like deer toward the village.

John kept on at the head of his force, and while the commotion in the
village, not a half mile distant, was plainly visible, he did not halt,
until he saw a curious crowd surrounding a short individual, who stood
apart from those around him.

"That is the Chief," said Laleo. "It is said he is a terrible man, and
unlike all others," thus repeating what the Chief had told John.

As he made no attempt to come forward or indicate what his wishes were,
John directed the men to follow him, fifty feet in his rear, and he went
on until within two hundred feet of the motley crowd, the people in the
meantime making no sign of resistance, nor did they object to the
advance.

When John stopped, the curious figure, who was designated as the Chief,
moved forward toward John without a bit of hesitation, and the boys were
simply dumbfounded at his singular appearance, and at the gait he
assumed.

A word picture of him would not be amiss. He was a hunchback, with an
extraordinary lump on his back, the arms much too long for his body, and
crooked, distorted legs. The head, however, was massive, and covered
with a heavy beard, which seemed to grow close up to the eyes, giving
him a fierce appearance, because his head was covered with a thick
coating of long gray, or sandy hair, that swung around the darker beard,
as he shambled along.

As he neared John his bright and staring eyes were the first thing
noticed. When he came across the intervening space, his face was stern,
and unforbidding, but as he neared John it relaxed, and he began to
smile.

John stepped forward, and extended his hand. "I am glad to meet you,"
said John.

The man looked at John for a moment, and then tried to mumble something,
that the boys could not understand. After a few attempts he fairly
shrieked out: "How are you?"

This was certainly a startling thing, because the voice and the
intonation were perfect. John opened his jacket and brought out a
miniature American flag, which was unrolled, and the moment the strange
being caught sight of it he seized it and pressing it to his lips,
kissed it fervently.

"I am an American," he finally struggled to utter. "I am a white man,
and you are the first white man I have seen for fifty years. You are
welcome to our home and village."

The boys could not credit their senses. How did this poor specimen of
the white race become the powerful Chief of a tribe of savage cannibals?

John looked at him for a moment in astonishment, as he asked: "How long
have you been Chief of the people here?"

"About forty-five years. They are good people too."

"We heard you were cannibals," remarked John.

For a moment he scowled, and then his face brightened up. "Yes; I know
my neighbors to the south have always believed that to be so, but they
have heard such tales from their witch doctors, such as we used to have,
but it is not true."

"You mean the Korinos?"

"Yes, those who left you two days ago, and have come to me for
protection," and he smiled as he said this.

"I tried to get them, but they eluded us," added John, by way of
information.

"You must pardon me, but it is still a little difficult for me to form
sentences. It is so long since I have talked to any one in my native
tongue. But I am impolite. Bring your people into the village, and let
us entertain you. I do so want to hear about the great world and what it
is now like."

The Chief turned to his people and told them that the White Chief was
from his own tribe, and that he came from a far-away country, on a visit
to him, and that they must treat the people as his own.

Nothing more was needed to make them welcome. George suggested to John
that Stut on the _Pioneer_ should be notified, but before they had time
to carry out the order a number of the villagers came rushing through
the village and sought out the Chief.

The latter turned to John and said: "My people tell me that there is a
large ship here."

"It is the vessel we came in," answered John, "and we were about to send
a messenger to tell them to anchor near the village."

"I am so happy to know this," said the Chief. "I want to see the ship,
because it is the first time that any one has stopped at our shores.
Some years ago we found some strange things that floated ashore from a
wrecked vessel, and I want to show them to you, because I cannot
understand what some of the things could be used for."

They were led through the principal street of the town. It was clean and
well kept; the huts were far better than those in the village they had
left, and the natives were, apparently, happy and contented.

As they marched along George was the first to notice a tall individual,
who, with several others, were edging away from the visitors.

"There they are!" he cried out. John turned to inquire, when Harry
commenced laughing, as he added: "Here are the Korinos, John!"

The latter looked in the direction indicated, and laughed when he saw
their discomfiture. The Chief was hurriedly informed of the situation,
and he laughed heartily, as he ordered one of his men to bring in the
fugitives.

They were ushered in, and Uraso told them that they were friends and not
enemies, and that the White Chief tried to secure them so that their own
Chief would not harm them. It was a great relief, unquestionably, and
their actions showed it. John then told them, that he wanted to have a
talk with them, and that he would assure them of their safety.




CHAPTER XI

THE HUNCHBACK CHIEF


The White Chief's house was built on a plan which was a vast improvement
over anything found on the two islands. True, it was nothing but an
assemblage of rooms, which surrounded an open court. The furnishings
were crude, but it was evident that all the articles were such as had
been taken from the wreckages on the shore.

Goods not native made, were noticed, and even a photograph, on a tin
plate, like the old style daguerreotypes, was observed by Harry. Three
chairs, one with a broken rocker, formed part of the furnishings in the
court. In one corner was a mass of articles, the case of a ship's
chronometer, the horn of a phonograph, some tin tubes of different
lengths, and other odds and ends, which could not be recognized.

"I am anxious to hear your story," said John. "If you have no objection
we should be glad to have you relate it."

"It will give me pleasure to tell of my experiences, although it may not
interest you; but before doing so you must partake of food, because I
know what it means to travel through our country. Besides I have ordered
it prepared, and it is now ready."

[Illustration: "_'It is copper,' said John_" [See p. 122]]

"These two men I have with me," said John, pointing to Uraso and Muro,
"are Chiefs of two powerful tribes, who live on a neighboring island,
and they are real friends I found there when these two boys and I were
shipwrecked there several years ago."

"I am, indeed, glad to welcome them. I see that they have adopted the
white man's clothing."

"Yes; and their people who are wonderfully interesting are engaged in
farming, and manufacturing."

Then John told him briefly the history of their experiences, and how the
people on Wonder Island were working out their salvation.

John's tale impressed him most forcefully. "You have made good use of
your talents. Unfortunately, for me, and for the natives here, I was not
able wholly to bring out the people from their low condition, as you
will be able to understand more fully when the story is told." He said
this sorrowfully, and with apparent regret.

After the meal, he continued his narrative: "I was a poor boy, a native
of the State of Massachusetts, and was bound to a whaler as a helper,
when less than fifteen years of age. It was a hard life, as you may
know. I had no education, and I learned the life of misery and sorrow
when I should have been at school.

"But during that and the second year I became hardened, and my
unfortunate physical condition made me the butt of my companions, and
one day, in a fit of resentment, I struck down one of my tormentors,
while in the harbor of Bedford, after which I escaped and made my way to
Boston.

"There, the next day, I found employment on an outgoing ship, that was
in the China service, and two days later, I was gratified to learn that
it would sail that night. I had a much easier berth, and now I found
that among those men I was considered better than a mere brute, and I
became acquainted with a young man who taught me to read.

"This was such a delight to me that I could hardly wait until my daily
duties were over, before the books were brought out, and by the time we
put into Shanghai, I could read and write, as well as perform many
examples in arithmetic.

"I knew nothing of geography, or of any other of the necessary parts of
education. Our outward trip was unexciting, but on the first return
trip, we met one of the dangerous monsoons, and the ship was wrecked.
One of my shipmates was the sole occupant of a spar, and he aided me in
my attempt to grasp it, and together we floated about the great sea for
several days, without a thing to eat or to drink, until I lost
consciousness, and knew no more until I opened my eyes, and saw the
vilest looking savages standing about me.

"When I saw them they appeared like a horrid dream. I had read in one of
the books about the terrible visions that men dream of, and when they
tried to make me eat something, I began to feel that it was a reality.

"But the men were naked, and I saw the bones of human beings about me,
and everything had the appearance of a feast. I soon saw that they were
cannibals, and as I had heard of their practices their faces grew more
and more repulsive to me.

"I recovered slowly, and now began the terror in my mind. Each day I
expected would be my last. But day after day passed by, and I soon began
to become reconciled to my fate. An incident soon changed the entire
aspect of affairs for me. I had been treated with the utmost deference.
I was furnished with an abundance of food, but I had previously learned
that it was the custom of those people to fatten their victims, and this
was not welcome knowledge.

"I became desperate. One day, while they were bringing me the finest
roasts, I rebelled, and taking a club, scattered the food, swinging the
club at them and shouting defiance, because human nature began to rebel,
and I could not stand the suspense any longer.

"To my surprise they scattered, and fell on their faces. Among them was
the head man, whom I had always regarded as the Chief. Finally he came
up timidly, and fell on his knees before me. I was so astounded that I
did not know what to do. I went to the Chief and raised him up, because
I was in a quandary, and could not understand them.

"This seemed to reassure him, and he told me to follow him. I had been
here long enough to understand most of their jargon. I was surprised
when he led me to his own hut, and brought out his daughter, who knelt
before me. Then I began to understand. I was no longer the expected
victim, but the prospective son-in-law. This was better than
anticipating death daily.

"I accepted the situation. The daughter became my wife. It was she who
welcomed you when we came in. When her father died I became Chief, but
long before his death, I controlled the people, as I knew so much more,
and had superior wisdom, judged by their standard, that they obeyed me
in everything.

"But much as I abhorred, and tried to prevent it, as I did on many
occasions, they practiced their rites, and had their Korinos, the real
offenders, who taught them the necessity of sacrifices.

"But when I became Chief, I sternly refused to permit them to kill their
captives, and cannibalism was practiced only by stealth. I succeeded in
stamping out the practice only by putting the Korinos to death, and in
shutting up their caves."

The boys, as well as John were riveted to their seats during this entire
recital, until he referred to the caves, when they relaxed, and
indicated their pleasure and anxiety. That meant still further quests in
that direction.

The Chief noticed their movement, and continued: "I am tiring you, but
permit me to add only a few things. I have endeavored to better the
condition of these people, and have succeeded. To the south of us was a
powerful tribe. My first care was to make ourselves secure against them.

"Like my people they, too, were cannibals. They were ruled over by a
Chief who was cruel, and whenever any of their people escaped I took
them in and cared for them, and there are now many of those living with
us who could not be induced to go back. For more than forty years no one
has been killed and eaten by my people."

"Your work here is certainly most commendable. There is nothing which
needs apology. Under the circumstances you have done all that was
possible, and to the best of your ability. No one can do more," was
John's timely observation.

"I thank you for the compliment. I owe everything to the few books which
my comrade taught me to read. When I left the United States my heart was
bitter toward all mankind. I could not see why I should have been
treated in such a harsh manner among civilized people, but when I landed
here and saw how much worse the conditions were, I began to reflect. It
would have been an easy and a natural thing for me to be brutal to
others, as they had been to me."

"You have shown a noble spirit, and I shall try to help you in caring
for your people. Our ship is here, and we have some things for you, as
soon as they can be unloaded," rejoined John.

During the afternoon communication was established with the _Pioneer_,
and the natives were willing helpers in bringing up the packages, but it
was too late to distribute them. Before leaving John said: "You have not
told us your name."

"I was christened Ephraim Wilmar."

John seized him by the hands, as he said: "And was your father's name
William?"

"Yes," said Ephraim, as his great eyes grew still bigger. "Did you know
him?"

"I knew him well; he died about thirty years ago. He was my father's
friend."

This information established a bond of friendship between the two.

"I have forgotten to take note of time, and I may be out a year or two
in my reckoning," continued Ephraim, "but according to the best
information I have this must be the year 1911."

"You are short one year; it is now 1912."

"Then let me see! We sailed from China in January, 1860; and during that
same month the ship went down. From that time to the present I have no
idea of what has taken place."

"Then you know nothing of the four years' war between the North and the
South?"

"No; I remember there was some trouble about the slaves, or something of
that sort before we left China."

"But there are no more slaves in the United States."

"You surprise me! Then they were freed by the war?"

"Yes; and Cuba is also free, and is now a republic, and the Hawaiian
Islands belong to the United States, as also do the Philippines."

"That does not seem possible. Why, if I remember correctly Cuba and the
Philippines belonged to Spain. When did the United States purchase
them?"

"We had a war with Spain, and we took the Spanish possessions, as well
as Porto Rico. Manila was captured three days after war was declared."

"Three days after war was declared! How could our fleet, which must have
been half the way around the world, get the news that war had been
declared in that time?"

"The commander of our fleet at Hongkong, was notified by telegraph."

"How could that be done without a telegraph line? Over what part of the
earth are the lines now running?"

"Everywhere; but there are many running under the sea and are called
_cable lines_."

Ephraim looked at John for a moment, as though he doubted the meaning of
the words just uttered, and then slowly inquired: "That must be a
remarkable thing. I do not see how it would be possible to string wires
under the sea."

"They are encased in water tight coverings, and some of the lines are
four thousand miles long. But nowadays we do not need wires for
telegraphing."

The deformed figure arose, and appeared to be agitated, as he said: "Do
you mean to say that messages can be sent without wires?"

"Stations for that purpose are now in operation all over the world."

"That is as improbable to me as though you should tell me that it would
be possible to talk over a wire," he answered.

"But we do talk over wires, and it is possible to talk over distances
hundreds of miles apart, without wires even."

He glanced at those about him, and shook his head. He appeared to
hesitate about asking any more questions, and after shambling back and
forth a dozen times, or more, he stopped at the pile of debris, and
picked up a thick disk-like piece of metal, to one side of which was a
short broken tube attached.

"I have examined this many, many times. Perhaps you can tell me what it
is?" and he handed it to John.

"This is the disk of a phonograph."

"What is that?"

"An instrument which will reproduce the human voice, or any noise, or
the sound of music."

"I do not understand what you mean. If I talk to it will it talk back to
me?"

"No; it is so arranged that one form of the instrument receives the
sound of your voice, and impresses it on material in the form of a
cylinder, or a disk, and if this cylinder or disk is put into another
instrument, this little apparatus, which I hold in my hand will speak
the same words you uttered."

[Illustration: _Fig. 11. Phonograph Disk._]

"Then electricity must be a wonderful thing, to be able to be used by
men to talk to each other all over the world, and even to preserve what
they say."

"But the phonograph is not an electrical apparatus. The disk, here, with
the little stylus, or pointer on it, vibrates and gives forth the
sound."

"All this is most marvelous, and I would like to see some of those
wonderful things," he exclaimed.

"If you will come to the ship we will show you many of the things that
electricity does, as we have a phonograph there, and we have a search
light that operates by electricity, and which enables us to see many
miles," added Harry.

"Yes; I must see your ship, and I am ready to accompany you any time,
and I want my people to see those things, as well."

"But there are many other things that we now do with electricity. All
street railways are now operated by it; many boats are run by that
power; cooking is done by it, and its uses extend into almost everything
that man touches," remarked John.

"If this one branch of knowledge has improved so wonderfully within a
space of fifty years, the progress in other directions must be very
wonderful, indeed," he responded. "But you have told me so much, and I
hardly know how I can grasp its meaning. I suppose things here in this
part of the world must appear very crude to you?"




CHAPTER XII

THE CHIEF'S FAMILY


Ephraim's wife was not crude and uncouth, like most of the native women.
It was evident from the care which she observed in the domestic
arrangements, that Ephraim had a hand in shaping her course.

The food was served with considerable care, and, in some degree with the
formality observed in civilized homes. John was a careful observer of
customs, and he was surprised to note that all the natives patterned
after the habits established by their Chief.

"I tried," said Ephraim, in answer to John's questions, "to better their
condition, and to teach them how to prepare and eat their food, and we
made vessels of pottery, which you will notice are found everywhere.
They understood the art of weaving, in a very primitive way, which I
also tried to improve. Only on three occasions did we take any toll from
the sea, when the wreckage came ashore.

"Of the articles which were thus recovered, I took only a fair share,
and the others were impartially distributed to the people."

"Did you ever have any trouble with the natives, or did they ever
dispute your authority?" asked John.

"Only once, many years ago. A man claiming to be the son of the Chief,
gathered together a number of adherents, but my people rose against
them, and killed the leaders, which I very much regretted. When I
remonstrated with them for the severity of their course, they justified
it by saying that I had been kind to them, and had made them better, and
it was the very thing that taught me to feel that human beings, although
savages, understand kind treatment. It made me a convert in my feelings
against some of the white men who had treated me with such severity."

During the day, after the packages had been removed from the ship the
articles were taken from the packages and arranged in Ephraim's home.
Articles of clothing were distributed to the Chief's family, and what
pleased him more than anything else, were the cooking utensils, all of
the newest ware, and in great variety, some of which were curiosities to
him.

He had four children, the eldest a young man about thirty years of age,
who had a family of three children; the next, a strong, active native,
about twenty-five; a medium-sized young woman, almost white, of about
twenty, and the youngest a lad of seventeen, who was quickly attracted
to the boys.

These, together with their mother, undertook the task of distributing
the gifts to the people. Articles of adornment were, of course, the most
enticing to the natives, and John had anticipated this feeling in the
selection of the gifts.

After the feast of the good things, John broached the subject next to
his heart, and that was to explore the island, and particularly the
caves. In referring to the matter he said:

"I recognize that whatever treasure we may find in them belongs to you,
and you are entitled to them."

"But they are of no use to us," he responded. "I am not wise in the ways
of the world, but I am sure that great wealth, in the way of gold and
silver, would not make my people happy. I agree with you that
employment, and trying to teach people to help and care for each other,
is much more likely to make them happy, and besides, the treasures which
you refer to could not be used by them to any advantage."

"You have spoken wisely," answered John, "nevertheless, we have no need
of the riches which we may find. My search is for a different sort of
wealth."

"I do not understand what could be of more advantage, or repay you
better than gold and silver."

"It is believed that many of these places contain the records of people
who have lived here thousands of years ago. All over the world hidden
treasures of that kind have been found, some of them which go to show
that men lived on the earth hundreds of thousands of years."

"You are much wiser than I am, and understand the reason for making such
a search, but I do not see why that would be of any use to know those
things."

"A great man once said, 'Know thyself,' and another remarked, that the
'proper study of mankind is man.' To ascertain the origin of humanity,
how man lived and acted, what were his motives and desires, his beliefs
and his aspirations, and to know how he has improved, are interesting
questions to me."

He mused at this statement for a long time, and then quietly said: "That
may be so; it may make us greater and better men, and it may be
gratifying to have that knowledge, but I have now arrived at that time
of life where things appear differently from the way I used to look at
them. Every year I begin to think less of myself, and more of those
about me.

"When my children grew up about me they were the only ones I cared for.
They were the only things in the world that interested me. When my
grandchildren came they were new inspirations to me, and my views toward
others changed, and made me feel better inclined."

"That shows, does it not, that as we grow older, and as the world
increases in age, everything improves, our minds, the advancements in
the arts, in the sciences, in inventions, and generally in the
improvement of the human race? It is a part of the whole education which
man in his improved condition is trying to instill, and it is human
knowledge, and the desire to learn everything, that gives a stimulus to
us."

There was no more welcome intelligence than the news that on the
following day they would visit the first cave in the northern hills, and
that Ephraim would accompany them. The people in the village were
delighted at the news that the ancient caves of the Korinos would be
opened.

The trip took on the nature of a pleasure expedition. Even the family of
the Chief were insistent on going along, and the boys quickly became the
friends of Camma, the youngest son of Ephraim, and insisted that he
should go back with them to Wonder Island on a visit when they returned.

Ephraim assented to this most heartily. They showed Camma the workings
of the revolver, and presented him with one of them. Then, when they
went to the ship, he was presented with a camera, and an outfit for
developing.

When the boys brought back a small hand sewing machine, and gave it to
Mene, young Camma's sister, the joy in that family was beyond all
bounds. Ephraim stood before the little machine, as though paralyzed. It
acted like a human being, only more perfectly, as its work showed.

But now for the caves. Sufficient food was taken along to make the trip
a comfortable one. The village in which Ephraim lived was nearly a half
day's journey from the original site of the town that was occupied by
the old Chief. He had founded the new site, near the sea, because of the
exposed condition of the old village, and also on account of the
unsanitary condition of the surroundings.

The caves were near the old town, and it required nearly five hours to
make the trip, but it was enjoyable, every step of the way. The three
boys engaged in hunting, on the way, because the new toy in Camma's
hands had to be put to use. Ephraim put no restraint on the jolly pranks
of the boys. John was careful to tell him that Harry and George were not
wild or reckless, and that Camma would find them healthy comrades.

Shortly after noon, they were told that the first of the caves would be
found in the hill toward the right, and that the work of opening the
principal one would not be undertaken until after luncheon.

You may be sure that the boys made a hurried meal, and without waiting
for the workers to come up, they grasped their weapons, and were soon
half way up the hill, their guide, an old man, who knew the location of
the caves, being with them, to show the way.

The old man pointed to the rocky wall, and indicated where the opening
was. Ephraim had closed it effectually, for they saw the evidence of the
wall before them, where its comparatively smooth surface showed the
difference between the natural wall and the rough rocks elsewhere.

"Where is the other cave?" asked George.

"It is on the other side," he answered.

"And is that also closed?"

"Yes; just as you see this."

When the workers came up John directed them how to commence at the top,
and take out a rock at a time. He smiled as he saw how well the work had
been done, and Ephraim was gratified at the praise bestowed.

"You certainly made a first class job of ashlar work," remarked John.

"What is that?" asked Ephraim, in surprise.

"It is just this kind of masonry where the courses are irregular, and
built up from the rock just as it came from the quarry."

"I was not aware that there were different kinds of masonry. I thought
that masonry was merely the placing together of stones so they would
bind each other, and that is the way I had them do it."

"Masonry is one of the oldest of the arts. It is really the foundation
stone of architecture. The work you have done here happens to be of rock
that has a rather smooth outline, that is, the stone broke off smooth,
in the upper layers, but the large pieces near the bottom represent what
is called rubble work."

[Illustration: _Fig. 12. Types of Masonry._]

"This is very interesting to know," remarked Ephraim.

[Illustration: "_The old man pointed to the rocky wall_" [See p. 152]]

"I might add," continued John, "that when the courses are not regular it
is called _broken_ ashlar; when stones of less than one foot in breadth
are used it is called _small_ ashlar; if the wall is backed by
rubble, or inferior work it is called _bastard_ ashlar. Then every kind
of surface has a particular name, like the _random-tooled_, where the
tool marks are shown in all directions; _rusticated_ when only the
joined edges are trimmed up; _prison-rustic_ when it is pitted with deep
holes; _herring-bone_ when it is tooled in rows of opposite directions
to each other; and _nigged_ when finished up with a pointed hammer."

Within an hour the stones were removed and put aside, and then Ephraim
was treated to another surprise when he was made acquainted with the
little electric flash lights which John exhibited. With these they
entered the cave.

All savage tribes have some sort of animals, as pets, and dogs are the
most frequent. This was the case among these people. The dogs were with
the party, and, as usual, ahead of the procession. Two of them went
ahead on a scouting expedition, while John and the boys, with their
flash lights followed.

After they had gone, probably two hundred feet, there was a slight
descent apparent in the floor of the cave, and ahead were the two dogs
stretched out, lifeless.

George ran ahead, as he noticed them, and John shouted out: "Do not
touch them!"

He stopped, and looked back, and then slowly walked up to the animals.
John requested the party to halt, and he went forward, and put his foot
on one of the dogs. "We must go back," he said.

"Are they dead?" asked Harry, as he came forward.

"Why not take them out and see what the trouble is?" inquired Harry.

"No need for that," responded John. "I know what the trouble is."

"Is there any danger in the cave?"

"Yes."

Ephraim and the natives were now alarmed. It will be remembered that the
universal belief among the natives is, that to go into these caves
unbidden, means death. True, John had shown the fallacy of this on
several occasions, but here was positive evidence that death had visited
the dogs, and this might be the fate of those who attempted to go on.

But the most alarming thing was the fact that John himself was the one
who said there was danger, and that they must return. He did not venture
to make an explanation until they were out of the cave.

"There is carbonic acid in the cave, and as it is a deadly poison we
cannot go in until it is removed."

"That seems singular," responded George. "I went in as far as the dogs,
and it didn't affect me."

"But you did not reach down to touch the dog."

"I saw you touch the dog, and it didn't seem to affect you."

"I touched it with my feet and not with my hands."

"I cannot see what difference that makes."

"If you had touched the dog with your hands it would have brought your
face down near the floor of the cave, and the gas is at the bottom of
the cave only."

"Why should it be there and not all over?"

"Because it is much heavier than the air we breathe, and remains at the
bottom, just like water. If you recall, this part is lower than the
corridor through which we came, so that it could not run out. I have
always observed that in all the other caves the floors within were
higher than the entrance, and in such cases there is no liability of
getting poisonous gases."

"But how are we to make the investigation, under the circumstances?"

"We must remove the gas."

"How can that be done?"

"Several ways are open; one would be to tap the floor and drain the gas
out, which would be difficult to do with our resources. Another plan
would be to force in a lot of air, so as to render the gas inert, or we
might put in enough air to make it burn, and consume it."

"Why, will it burn?"

"Most assuredly; all it needs is enough air; but I am afraid this plan
will not be a very safe one for us. If the floor of the cave is not at
any place more than four feet below the entrance, we can go about
safely, but in such case we must move about with the utmost caution, so
as not to get too much of the gas in the system."

"I am afraid it will be a difficult thing to go in unless we know
absolutely where the low places are, or unless we survey the bottom of
the cave," said George, brightening up at the idea.

"What would happen if we threw a light into the bottom where the gas
is?"

"It would be extinguished instantly," remarked John.

"That gives me an idea," asserted George. "Why not take a lamp, and
carry it ahead of us, about three feet from the ground, and whenever
that goes out, it will show there is gas there?"

"That is a good observation; but I am afraid it would be very dangerous
to do that."

"Dangerous? I thought you said that the carbonic gas would put out the
light?"

"So it will; but if three parts of air should be added to one part of
the gas it will make an explosive mixture,--that is, a mixture which
will burn, as there has been enough oxygen added to support combustion."

"In what way could enough air mix with the gas to make it burn?"

"By stirring it; the movement of the body might make an admixture just
above the surface of the gas, which would burn, and that might mean a
catastrophe for us."

"Then we are certainly stopped at this cave."

"Not by any means," rejoined John, and he saw the boys' faces smiling
again. "We must make a safety lamp."

"Do you mean a lamp that will not explode the gas, although it has
enough oxygen to 'support combustion,' as you say?"

"Exactly. Have you ever heard of the Humphrey Davy lamp? Well, that was
invented to meet the very condition found here."

"Tell us about it."

"In 1816 Davy discovered that a flame would not pass through a fine wire
gauze, while conducting some experiments. It occurred to him that use
could be made of this discovery by surrounding the flame of a lamp with
gauze, and the well-known lamp was built on that principle."

"What I am curious to know is, that if it will not burn the gas, will it
go out if it gets down in the gas?"

[Illustration: _Fig. 13. Types of Safety Lamps._]

"Yes; because enough air, or oxygen must go through the mesh to support
combustion of the flame itself. If it does not get enough it is
smothered."

"Then why not make a lamp of that kind?"

"But where can we get enough gauze to make a cylinder big enough to go
around a lamp?"

John laughed at the serious predicament, which expressed itself in the
faces of the boys. "That is true," he said; "but if we can get a small
piece of tin, we can punch it full of fine holes, and probably make
that answer."

"We haven't anything in the way of tin large enough to go around a lamp,
but here is a round piece, about three inches in diameter."

"That will answer; punch that as full of holes as possible, and be sure
they are very small."

"What shall we use for a lamp?"

John was already looking around, and soon spied a tree in the distance
that looked like a small pine, and beneath that he found some cones, a
dozen of which were picked up.

[Illustration: _Fig 14. How John made the Lamp._
 _A. Perforated Disk_
 _B. Frame of Sticks_
 _C. Cloth Covering_
 _D. Base Plate._]

"That is a pine tree, isn't it?"

"Yes; these cones will burn for some time."

"But they will not make much of a light."

"No; but we are not after a light, but they will do for testing
purposes."

The accompanying sketches show how it was made. A plate was used for a
base, on which the burning cone was placed. A half dozen twigs were
then provided, and these were bent U-shaped, after being secured
together at their middle portions, and the lower ends held by a cord,
and this was then inverted, and a piece of thin cotton goods, of a
single thickness, only was wound around the little frame, leaving an
opening at the top, which was covered by the perforated tin disk.

"There, now we have an article which provides for the admission of air,
through the cotton goods, and the product of combustion can escape
through the perforated opening at the top."

The boys danced around with joy, when the cone was ignited, and a bale,
which was simply a string, attached, so it could be carried
conveniently.

This time they went on, far beyond the place where the poor dogs lay.
Occasionally John would lower the device, and when it descended too far,
the knot would begin to smoke, and this was explained by the statement
that as it went into the carbon gas, less and less air was supplied,
which caused the flame to die down.

The cave was similar to the others, being white from the lime deposits,
but in all their wanderings they had never seen anything to compare with
the beautiful hangings noted in the interior, particularly in the
chambers, which they passed, one after the other, four of which were
especially admired.

Ephraim was intensely interested. He never had taken the trouble to
visit any of these caverns, and was not disposed to take much stock in
the many tales that had been related about the weird interiors.

"I can now understand," he said, "why the natives possessed such a fear
of them. I have faced many perilous conditions, during my life here, but
I confess if I had any faith in the superstitions about these places,
they would have paralyzed me, now that I have seen their ghostly
appearance."

They suddenly emerged into a spacious chamber, so large that their
voices seemed to reverberate. The flash lights were directed to all
sides and to the immense vaulted and icicle-covered ceiling. John stood
the lamp on the ground. It was free from the dangerous gas. The floor
was fairly level, but it was covered with the broken hangings from the
ceiling.

"I see an outlet, directly opposite the one we came by," exclaimed
George.

The party hastened across the intervening space. They were traveling
along the greatest length of the chamber. Midway between the two
openings were two other side openings, and John stopped and exclaimed:
"It is true! We have found it!"

The boys had never seen John so agitated before. They pressed around and
requested an explanation, but he fumbled in his pocket, and soon drew
forth a carefully wrapped piece of brown paper.

"This is parchment. It contains the sketch of the cave that has been the
object of my search. I believe we are the only white people who have
ever been privileged to enter it since the chart was made three
centuries ago."

Ephraim, as well as the boys, glanced about them. What was there to
excite him? Other caves had the same sort of formation, the chambers and
the openings: and while they wondered John drew a compass from his
pocket, and after holding it for a while, continued:

"This chamber runs north and south as you see. We entered on the south
side. It had two other outlets, one to the east, the other to the west."

"Then it is the cross-shaped cave!" almost shouted George.

"Yes," answered John, as he fixed his eyes on the boys. "In the year
1620, a Spanish navigator found a cave, of which this is a description,
and within it were found the remains of hundreds of people."




CHAPTER XIII

THE CHART AND THE CAVES


John pored over the map, without going any further. Evidently something
was passing in his mind, for occasionally his eyes left the paper and he
looked about, as though undecided.

"Do you know any more about what they found?"

"Yes; there are many incomplete portions belonging to the history, but
it may be summed up by the statement, that they also found an immense
amount of treasure, much of it in the form of solid gold. The
adventurers were wild with joy at the discovery, and took steps to
remove it.

"Before proceeding far they found carvings and inscriptions, the latter
of which were unintelligible to them, but they were very curious,
judging from the few sketches which were made. But like many men of
their class they began to quarrel over the treasure, and fought each
other to the death."

"That was just like the fellows who lived in the cave at the Cataract,"
suggested Harry.

"No doubt that was over the treasure, too, there, as well as here. Four
of the men escaped, only to be chased by savages, and after finally
reaching their vessel were almost wrecked because they did not have
enough properly to man the ship.

"After reaching civilization, they engaged a number of men, and
returned. Some went in, among them two of the original discoverers. They
did not return for some days, and another party went in, but they did
not return.

"Only one of the four remained, and when their companions did not
return, the others took fright and returned to the vessel. Juan Guiterez
was the name of the sole survivor of the first expedition. The
adventurers who accompanied him declared that he and his company had
lured them to the strange isle, in order to destroy them, and on the
return to the first Spanish port, he was cast into prison, and remained
a prisoner for nearly twenty years.

"This chart, or what remains of it, or from which this copy was made was
written by him while in prison, but the singular thing is, that while he
was explicit in many things, he did not leave a clue as to the location
of the island. Many of the things on it, as you see, are very faint."

The boys now examined the chart for the first time. Harry started back
in surprise, as he pointed to the chart, and looked up at John. "Why,
there are the same marks we found on the skull at Wonder Island!" he
exclaimed in great excitement.

"Quite true! and do you now wonder why I have been so much interested to
find the location? Chance has thrown this opportunity our way. It is
true we might be mistaken, but the description fits."

It would require pages to tell about what they found in the recesses of
the cavern. Hundreds and hundreds of skeletons were discovered, and the
most curious tablets and carvings in hieroglyphics were scattered in the
adjoining chamber.

Peculiarly-formed tools, implements of warfare, also of metal, small
slabs of uniform size, and with characters on both sides, which might
have been the historical books of the singular people who lived here
ages ago, were in profusion not only in the large chamber, but in the
most unexpected places.

To John it was a vast storehouse of archeological wealth. To the boys it
was much more. There were still some things that John did not explain,
and which they wanted to know.

"Do you believe that the different parties went in and never came back
again?" asked George.

"I have no doubt but the account was true."

"What became of them?"

"They probably met the fate that almost overtook us when we first went
in," was the answer.

The parchment was correct in the main details, as to the records within
the cave, but there were no treasure, nor could any trace be found of
them. They spent several days in the search, but to no avail. The boys
were not much disappointed, it may be said, but they were gratified to
know that John had accomplished the one desire of his life, and they
knew, also, that it would be a source of great joy to the Professor.

It was found that the cave entrance at the opposite side of the hill was
the northern outlet to the same set of caverns, and Ephraim did not know
of any others that existed in the northern part, so that they did not
feel it to be desirable to take up more time in this direction.

They had now found two isles, besides their own loved island, and when
they assembled that evening in the cabin of the _Pioneer_, they had a
most earnest conversation as to the results of their latest enterprise.

"We have sought the treasures of the islands, and what have we
accomplished?" asked George.

"What have we accomplished? I have been thinking that to find the
natives here, and to be able to help them, is a pretty big thing in
itself," answered Harry.

"That is true," he responded, "and the same thing might be said, also,
about the wonderful products of the islands; they are certainly worth
coming here for. I wonder what Blakely would say if he knew of all there
is here, and the knack shown by the natives to handle the things?"

"I am in sympathy with your views," said John. "Treasures, like gold and
silver, are worth seeking for, but when you find that the earth is
inviting people to till it, and there are people who, through ignorance,
do not know how the earth can be utilized, it is a great privilege to be
able to help them, and the recollection of what you have done will be
the greatest treasure not only to you but to the poor people that have
been benefited."

"I think Ephraim's story is a wonderful one," said George, "but he could
not go far. His education was limited, but see what he has done with the
little he knew."

"It was curious, however, that the cannibals had fear for him. I cannot
understand that," rejoined Harry.

"Savages are children only. They have the capacities of full grown men,
but have never had the opportunities. Their superstitions lead them
into singular forms of reasonings. With them the deformed are objects of
curiosity, and generally, of reverence. Those mentally deficient are
regarded as possessing a superior spirit."

"I remember that the Professor told us so on one occasion, but it seems
to be singular that they should get that view. How do you account for
it?"

"That is a trait, or, I may say, a belief which is not at, all uncommon
among civilized people. Throughout Europe many men, who lived years ago,
are reverenced as Saints, and, who, from the accounts given of them,
were demented. Why, it is even claimed that there is but one step from
the abnormally gifted to the insane person."

"Is that really so regarded among learned men?"

"It has been the subject of many remarkable books which have been
written to show that genius and insanity are closely allied. Take, for
instance, the case of Blind Tom, an ignorant negro, who, although he
could not read, nor did he know a single note of music, was able,
nevertheless, to play the most marvelous music, and repeat, at a single
hearing, an entire musical score."

"But such talents, as that, I have heard, is only in some particular
direction. He was not able to do anything else," suggested George.

"Quite true. But it is so with what is called genius. I once knew a
learned minister, a leading professor in one of the colleges, who was
absolutely devoid of any other phase of education, except theology. He
could not master the first rudiments of mathematics, and knew no more of
astronomy than a ten year old boy, but he was supreme in his particular
branch of knowledge."

But the great question with John and the boys was the future. Two
islands had been discovered. Some of the mysteries of the past three
years had been solved, but others still remained; in fact, those which
interested them the most, were still shrouded in a veil through which
there was only the slightest glimpse.

John felt that their first duty would be thoroughly to explore the
island to the north and west of the village, and thus enable them to
make a complete report when they returned to Wonder Island, and this
course was finally decided upon.

The spirit of John had now entered Ephraim. He had fully agreed to
accompany them in the _Pioneer_, and learn of their great work on that
island. He said that it was his duty to his children and to the natives
who had stood by him so nobly, to provide for their future welfare.

He was most active in arousing the people to an understanding of the
mission of John and the boys. Within a day, all preparations were made
for the journey through the island, and Ephraim was with them in order
to learn all that might be necessary, so that when he returned he could
advise the people.

For more than a week they tramped through the attractive portions of the
land, and then the day was set for departure.

"I have been thinking of making a trip to your friends in the South,"
said John, as they were dining at Ephraim's home, the day before the
date of sailing.

"That would please me more than anything else," replied Ephraim. "It
occurs to me that is the first step toward peace and prosperity on the
island."

"Then we shall sail to their village, and from that place go to Venture
Island, where we had our first adventures, stopping, on the way at
Hutoton, where they have a criminal colony."

"What is that?" inquired Ephraim. "A criminal colony?"

"Yes," said John. "On the large island to the south, which we discovered
before we came here we found a singular condition of things. Near the
southern end of the island we came into contact with a tribe ruled over
by a Chief, named Beralsea, a powerful man; in fact, there is no law
there except the will of the Chief."

The boys were now laughing immoderately, and Ephraim was moved to smiles
at their mirth. "It must have been very amusing, I have no doubt," he
said.

"We were thinking of the jolly time we had when Sutoto married the
Chief's daughter," said George.

"We shall tell you all about it on our way there," added Harry.

"I was about to say," continued John, as he also smiled at the
reminiscence, that his views on theft were most peculiar. He did not
regard it as a crime if the people stole from each other. But if they
attempted to steal from him, or tried to deceive him, it was such a
great crime, that the unfortunates were banished to a place called
Hutoton, which, as he stated, meant the Place of Death.

"We were informed that it was a terrible place, and when a man was
sentenced it also meant a like sentence to all of his family, and that
no one was ever known to return from that horrible prison home."

"I have heard, but only vaguely, that there was such a place, but had no
idea that it was so near to us. But did you verify the character of the
place?"

"We went there, and instead of finding a barren and uninviting spot, and
misery and want, we saw a lovely village, and people so much more
advanced than those in the village ruled over by the Chief, that we were
amazed.

"The ruler there treated us handsomely, and had even taken care in the
most kindly manner, of a white man who had escaped the rigors of the sea
some years before, and who was demented, or incapable, through
paralysis, of recognizing those around him."

Ephraim started as John said this. "A white man, did you say? How old
was he? Where is he now?"

"We sent him to Wonder Island where the Professor has taken care of him,
no doubt," Harry interjected.

"You appear agitated. Have I recalled anything that might give a clue to
his identity?" queried John.

"No; it could not be possible! It was merely a passing fancy. Strange,
how things sometimes will affect you. No, I do not know that I can add
anything to your knowledge concerning him." The subject was not again
alluded to during that day.

Ephraim and his family were taken aboard the _Pioneer_. Everything was
marvelous to them. The cabin with its complete furnishings, the musical
instruments, the phonograph, the piano player, which acted like a
wizard, because it gave out the sweet musical tones, as though it were a
living thing, and then a moving picture screen, which was the last thing
the boys installed before they left New York, made up a series of
entertainments for the family that had no end of marvels for them.

"To think of it; for fifty-two years this is the first time I have paced
the decks of a vessel. It is the happiest day of my life." And Ephraim
could scarcely keep the tears from coming. Happiness shows itself in
that way with the strongest, not with the weakest. The strong man can
stand the miseries and the sufferings much better and with a braver
front than the weak; but excessive joy will break him down so that he
manifests it more easily.

John saw his emotion and sympathized with him. Taking him by the arm he
led him to the cabin forward, and as they entered the cozy library, he
pointed to the books. This was the end of Ephraim for that day.

Without leaving the room he moved from case to case and scanned shelf
after shelf, and when John, on one occasion came in, he heard him
mutter: "Is there another place like this on earth?"

Late that evening the _Pioneer_ took down part of its sail as they
approached land in the distance.

"We are nearing Hutoton," shouted George.

Stut ordered the whistle to blow, and before the landing was reached the
shore was lined with the people. They soon recognized the visitors, and
the boats were prepared before the anchor finally dropped.

The entire crew of the _Pioneer_ went ashore, and Ephraim was curious to
see the head man, and have a conversation about the manner in which the
colony was conducted.

The boys could not understand the change of plans. Why did they not stop
at the southern part of the island, and visit the Malosos, who were
supposed to be Ephraim's enemies?

It was learned that John and Ephraim, after the vessel started,
concluded it would be wiser to visit Hutoton first and get all the
information possible from them concerning the time, condition, and
circumstances of the casting ashore of the white man found there when
John and his party made their visit.

In explanation of their action, it may be well, also, to state that they
still had on board of the _Pioneer_, the white man they had rescued or
taken from the stockade in the Malosos village, and that there were
certain things in his tale that seemed improbable to John.

The visit to Hutoton might be able to clear up the mystery, and possibly
establish the identity of the paralyzed man, and in that event it would,
not be necessary to go directly to the Malosos village but await their
return from Venture Island before visiting the village.

While the old man was being taken from the vessel, George went to John
and inquired: "Did he ever tell you his name?"

"Oh, yes; he says it is Henry D. Retlaw."

All noticed that he stole furtive glances about him as he was being
conveyed to the village.

"Were you ever here before?" asked John, as they neared the house of the
magistrate.

He shook his head vigorously, and answered "No!" with a vehemence that
startled John.




CHAPTER XIV

RESCUE ISLAND


Orders had gone out to prepare to receive the visitors in true Hutoton
style, but, in truth, the people did not need any urging. The
remembrance of the last visit, when the gifts were so judiciously
distributed, was sufficient to assure a generous welcome.

It was out of the question to leave that night, and John felt it to be a
duty to cultivate their acquaintance, and confer with the chief
magistrate about starting the people at work gathering the native
products.

John announced that within a month it was proposed to establish regular
sailings between that port and Wonder Island, which would enable them to
get supplies and ship their products each week. This intelligence was
then imparted to the people, who received it with the greatest
enthusiasm.

"One of the objects of the present visit is to take you with us to
Wonder Island," said John, addressing the leader, "so that you may learn
what we are doing, and come back prepared to instruct your people."

When this information was conveyed to him, he cast down his eyes, and
said sorrowfully: "But I am a convict, like the others, and I have been
condemned to stay here. If I leave this place I disobey the law of the
Chief."

John smiled as he replied: "I have provided for all that. You will meet
your Chief Beralsea in Unity, the Capital of Wonder Island. Hutoton is
no longer the terrible place that the Chief pictured to us. He told me
that your assistance was necessary to him and to the people in the
colony."

This information was received in gratitude, and his consent was thus
readily obtained.

After a night of feasting, preparations were made for the departure.
Retlaw was brought to the place where the paralyzed man was discovered,
and the leader Caramo accompanied them.

The moment Caramo saw him he turned to John and said: "I have seen that
face before. I am sure he accompanied another man when on one occasion a
boat load came ashore a long way to the south of us."

"How long ago was that?"

"Not more than three suns ago."

It must be understood that _three_ suns meant with these people, three
years by our reckoning. When Retlaw was examined he denied that he had
ever been on the island before, and, of course, there was no way to
discredit his statements. After all, Caramo might be mistaken in
identifying him, as they were some distance apart at the time the island
was supposed to have been visited by Retlaw.

At noon of the following day the _Pioneer_ weighed anchor, and set sail
for the southern port of the northern island, there to visit Chief Ta
Babeda, of the Malolos.

While they were skimming the shore south of the village, George said:
"There is one thing we have neglected. We have had so much to do lately
that we haven't found time for it, but there is an opportunity now."

"What is that?" asked Harry.

"We have no name for the island to which we are now going. We might
consult Ephraim. It would be hardly fair to impose any sort of name on
his country," suggested George, with a good humored laugh.

Ephraim was delighted at the idea. "We must have a name, assuredly, but
it never occurred to me before. The natives called it Rescudada; at any
rate that is as near as I can recall the pronunciation of the word."

"Why, that is almost like Rescue."

"Why wouldn't that be a good name?" asked Ephraim. "There has been
considerable rescue work here, and it is going on all the time."

"That's the name for it!" exclaimed Harry, enthusiastically.

"Suppose we notify General John and Skipper Stut that the Geographical
Society has just named the island 'Rescue'?"

This important function was attended to and a note made in the log that
the island discovered in south latitude 41 deg. 37' 10", and west longitude
138 deg. 2' 56", by the steamship _Pioneer_, was formally named _Rescue_.

Long before the village was reached the great fog horn of the _Pioneer_
commenced to give the signal. The villagers knew what it meant, and the
old Chief himself was at the landing place to welcome the visitors.

The boats were manned by the sailors, and the boys, together with John,
Ephraim, and Caramo, were in the first boat. When Ta Babeda gazed at
Ephraim, he was astounded. John had not informed him of the name of his
visitor, but he continued to gaze at him in amazement.

It was evident that the old Chief was impressed with his appearance, so
unlike anything he had ever before known in the form of a human being.
When they arrived at the Chief's house, John awaited the proper time
before making the introductions, and finally said:

"It gives me pleasure to introduce to you, the greatest enemy you have.
This is Rumisses, the Cannibal Chief of the Umbolos."

The Chief was startled beyond measure. True, he knew that John and his
party had come into contact with his arch enemy, but this was certainly
a thrilling way to bring them together.

Ephraim walked forward and seized the Chief by the hand, and then
pressed his nose against him. This was, of course, symbolic of
friendship.

The Chief unhesitatingly accepted the token, but he could not remove his
eyes. Here was the man, so unlike all others, and the impression of
superiority, undoubtedly, was also in his mind, but Ephraim quickly
relieved him of his reflections, as he said:

"Because I am so unlike you, is not due to any particular knowledge, or
favor from the Great Spirit. I am a white man, like the Great Chief
here, and was unfortunate to be cast among the natives in the north,
and I have tried for many years to prevent the practicing of the
sacrifices, and have succeeded."

"But we were told that all the people you captured from us were
sacrificed."

"It is not true. They are all living with us in perfect happiness and
contentment."

"Then why is it that we have been so much deceived?"

"Because the Korinos have not told you the truth. They did this because
they knew no better."

"Yes; the White Chief has told us that they have deceived us, and I
believe him. But I learn that my Korinos have gone to you for
protection!"

"Yes; and I have shielded them, and they are now on board of the vessel
in the harbor."

This information brought back all the native resentment of the old
Chief. "Then he has brought them back to me!" he exclaimed in great
earnestness.

"I believe he intends to do so, but it will not be until they go to
Wonder Island, that marvelous place."

"Then I am content."

John heard the conversation, and soon turned it into another direction,
when he informed the Chief that the Chief of Venture Island as well as
the leader of the criminal colony, were to accompany them to Wonder
Island, and that the company would be incomplete without him and his
family.

He looked at his visitors for some time, doubting in his mind the
propriety of such a course, but the entreaties of Ephraim, and the
urging of Muro and Uraso, were sufficient to decide the question, and
the only matter that now weighed on his mind was to determine who should
accompany him in this wonderful voyage.

Ta Babeda had never summoned up sufficient courage, while the ship was
formerly in port, to board the vessel. His examination of the _Pioneer_
was made from the shore. Now he would step into a new world.

He little knew what wonders would be exhibited to him. The ship's band
was the greatest thing he had ever known, and he never tired of its
music. But when he saw the curious piano, the music box that acted as
though it had life, and the other evidences of civilized arts, that were
found in the cabin, he was content to make the best of it.

Like all natives, as we have already stated, he was immoderately fond of
eating, and the kitchen arrangements, where food was cooked without any
fuel, interested him beyond everything else. He would sit at the
entrance of the kitchen for minutes at a time.

The push buttons, the snap switches for the electric lights and for the
cooking apparatus, were some things which he could not understand. The
little innocent wires meant nothing to him, nor could the boys, or even
John, explain the phenomenon to him so he could understand it.

The boys puzzled over this, as he was insistent upon an explanation.
What finally happened, the very thing the boys tried to avoid in every
way, came when he touched the two wires, and formed a short circuit
through his hand.

He emitted one yell, and bounded out through the door, and it was some
time before he could be induced to make further investigations. His
expressions were very humorous, particularly when he insisted that the
wires were mad, and didn't like him, and that they tried to pull his
arms out of his shoulders.

Harry then took two of the wires and brought them together, and then
pulled them apart. Each time this was done, a spark would flash. The
object was to show that two wires were necessary to produce a circuit or
a current.

Eventually an inspiration seemed to strike him, as he exclaimed: "They
are married! Yes, I see!"

The boys laughed as they told John of the circumstance, and how utterly
impossible it was to produce a current until a circuit was established.

John threw himself back and roared at the recital of the story, as told
by the boys. "I think his description is a pretty good one. Perhaps he
was thinking of the family circle?" and John continued to laugh as the
boys tried to grasp the full meaning of his little joke.

But Ta Babeda was an apt pupil. He was far more acute than Beralsea, and
there scarcely was an hour but he had one of the boys at his side trying
to fathom some of the mysteries in the new world. This was in the nature
of a picnic for the boys, who enjoyed his curious questions and his
equally unexpected comments.

Ephraim, too, was generally present, as well as Camma, his eldest son,
the latter evincing remarkable knowledge for one who had never known of
the wizardry that resides in wood and stones and iron.

To Ephraim this opportunity to open the wide world to his children must
have been a heaven of delight, and he reveled in every hour and even
regretted that nature demanded sleep. It seemed to be better awake and
seeing and feeling. Two weeks prior to this he had merely existed; now
he was a man again, and living.

It was, indeed, a merry party on board of the noble ship. When the
Chief, and those about him were told that the vessel was the creation of
George and Harry, it was another occasion to marvel over.

"Your boys can do the same thing, and make other things just as
wonderful," said John, as they were commending and petting the boys.

"Do you think so!" asked Ta Babeda, in great earnestness, and for the
first time showing any curiosity or indicating any desire to give his
children any advantages.

John saw that the leaven was working, as he replied: "That is why I have
been so anxious to have you and your children visit our city. Your wife
and daughters will find as many surprising things to interest them as
the boys will discover."

The run from Rescue to Wonder Island, would occupy, ordinarily, about
ten hours, of a complete day, and for that reason the start was made
early in the morning. Unity was about eight miles from the sea, on a
large stream, and it was desirable to make the run through the river by
daylight.

But shortly before noon a wind sprang up from the west, and it increased
in intensity, so that shortly after the noon hour they were compelled to
make a long tack to the south. This meant a night on board ship, and a
stormy one at that.

The wide, wide sea, without the sign of any land in sight was, indeed, a
fascinating thing to the natives, and how they admired the native
sailors with whom they readily fraternized. They watched every movement,
the taking down of the sails, the changing of the angles of the great
sheets, as they turned in their course, the handling of the tiller, and
all the paraphernalia of sailing, for the _Pioneer_ depended principally
on her sailing capacity, and not on the small engine with which she was
equipped.

The boys explained to Camma, that upon their return to the island a much
larger engine would be installed, so that they need not depend upon the
sails thereafter, but would be able then to sail directly through the
wind, instead of being blown back and forth, as was now the case.

The wind did not abate until the morning was breaking, and then there
was a welcome change in the direction that the storm was taking. Many of
the natives were ill, and John had the satisfaction of administering the
new and lately-discovered remedy, namely, Atropine.

Shortly after ten o'clock the eastern end of Wonder Island was sighted.
The great mountain range was visible, and the identical headland, where
the skull with the inscription was found, could be discerned through the
mild haze.

There was immense curiosity on board the ship as it skirted along the
shore. The Tuolo landing place was sighted, but they continued past it.
Two hours afterward they could plainly see the dock which had been
built for the use of Uraso's people, and an hour later Muro was just as
much interested to point out to Ephraim and Ta Babeda the landing
station of his tribe.

Immediately after luncheon, George, who was always on the alert, ran
through the vessel, with his field glass in hand, and announced that the
_Wonder_, the large steamship, which made trips to Chili, was coming up
in the distance, and heading, as they were, for the mouth of Enterprise
River, which flowed past the city.

All were intensely excited at the announcement, and rushed forward to
get a glimpse of the great ship. As she came up the streamers began to
fly from every spar and mast, and Harry ran up to Stut, and asked why
the _Pioneer_ did not have them out.

"But they are ready and will be flown as soon as we get nearer." As he
said this the first ones were unfurled. Then the _Wonder_ blew three
long blasts which the _Pioneer_ answered.

"They are going to let us go in first," said John. Such was, indeed, the
case, for the _Wonder_ slowed down, and the _Pioneer_ entered the mouth
of the river, for the last eight miles of the eventful cruise.

Two miles from the town both vessels began to blow signals with the fog
horns, and long before the wharf was reached the people began to flock
from all sides.

One little incident pleased the boys beyond all measure. On the bridge,
and furiously waving his arms, and swinging an American flag was Sutoto,
with his bride by his side.

"So Sutoto has been on a wedding trip to Chili?" remarked Harry.

Such was the case, as they afterwards learned. Both boys were busy
explaining the sights and the locations of the different buildings to
Beralsea and Ephraim, and the latter was much affected as he saw the
flag floating from the tall staff in the principal square of the city.

Beralsea had seen Sutoto wave the flag from the bridge of the _Wonder_,
and when he saw the same sort of emblem on the staff, he inquired of
Ephraim the meaning of the curious thing. It was then explained to him
that it was the magic combination of colors which their great tribe
believed in, and which was always raised above them wherever they were,
as a symbol that they were protected by it.

"But how can that protect the people? Is there something in it like the
unseen lightning, which we have on the ship?"

"Unseen lightning, is a pretty good name, coming from a savage,"
remarked Harry in an undertone.

"No; not in that way," answered Ephraim, "but whenever people see it,
wherever they may be, they know that the tribe is great enough to give
protection to any one who may try to injure any member of our tribe."

"The White Chief has told me that there are many islands and countries,
and that the world is round, and is peopled by many different tribes. Do
the people everywhere know that 'flag,' as you call it?"

"Yes; in every part of the world."

"Who are those two men standing there alone?" asked Ta Babeda.

"I do not know," responded Ephraim. "This is the first time I have been
here. The boys will know."

"That," answered George, "is the Professor,--that is, the man with a
white beard and hair. The large man by his side is Beralsea, the Chief
of the tribe on Venture Island."

Ephraim looked at Ta Babeda for a moment, with an amused smile, and then
remarked: "He is almost as large as you are."

The _Wonder_ was the first to get her cables to the dock, and as she
swung against the wharf, and the gang plank was fixed in place, the
first ones to spring ashore were Sutoto and Cinda, the latter of whom
rushed to her father's outstretched arms, and then to her mother and the
other members of the family.

The boys did not know how or where to extend the first greetings. There
was Sutoto and Lolo, and the dear old Professor, who considerately kept
in the background, but the boys insisted on giving him the first
greeting.




CHAPTER XV

THE RETURN TO WONDER ISLAND


"That was an awfully sly thing to do, as soon as our backs were turned,"
said George, as Sutoto and Cinda were finally free from the vigorous
greetings.

"What is that?" asked Cinda.

"To run away without giving us notice!"

"But we have seen the great wide world, and it is wonderful, and I can
never tell the people here how grand it is."

And then the boys looked at Cinda, and when they saw the latest fashions
displayed, the prettiest gown, the neatest slippers, and the stunning
hat they took off their caps, and made a neat bow in recognition of that
feminine touch of character which so readily adapts the sex for
acquiring the latest fashions wherever they may be.

Every one was wild with excitement. "There is Blakely!" shouted Harry.
"Hurrah! old boy! We have the place for you to visit, as soon as
possible. The finest island you ever saw, and the people all ready for
business."

"My hands are full now; we must have another ship. Look at the _Wonder_;
she is so full of goods that we are more than eight hours behind time.
But I am arranging for another steamer."

"Too bad that we are finding more islands than you can handle,"
responded George; "I suppose we shall have to find another manager?"

"Or several assistants," said Blakely.

"What are all these men here for?" asked Harry. "Why the whole island
must have come to town."

"Well, we have had to send for all the spare men from the different
tribes. Fifty of the Tuolos just came in this morning, and thirty of the
Illyas arrived yesterday, with their families. The _Wonder_ must be
unloaded, and start back again before six this evening. But what did you
find that looks as good as Venture Island?"

"Rescue Island; a dandy place, and much bigger than Venture Island. And
what do you think? We found a chief there who is a white man," remarked
George.

"A white man? Where is he from?"

"Massachusetts; and he is humpbacked, but as bright as can be."

"I saw him, did I not? He was on the _Pioneer_?"

"Yes; there he is with Ta Babeda."

"Ta what?"

"That's the Chief's name who owned the other tribe on Rescue Island.
Isn't he an immense fellow? But he is a brick; I can tell you. Come over
and I'll introduce you," and Harry pulled Blakely over while the latter
resisted, as the men were constantly besieging Blakely for orders.

"Never mind the work now. Get acquainted with the _big_ men first," and
the Professor laughed as he saw the boys forcibly tug at Blakely and
haul him over to the group.

"This is one of the big men we have on the island," said Harry to Ta
Babeda, and the latter looked at Blakely for a moment, and began to
smile, for while Blakely was chunky he was not at all large, if the
Chief might be taken as a standard.

He took Ta Babeda's hand, and welcomed him most heartily, and then
turned to Ephraim, and also extended a greeting.

"This is the man who does all the business," said Harry, "and he is
going to make you a visit." At this point they were interrupted.

"Shall we store all the pineapples aft," said a man hurriedly.

"No; put them amidship," he answered.

"We have no crates for the vegetables," said another.

"Never mind, put them in the large boxes, and they can be crated on the
way."

"Some more men have just come; what shall we put them at?" was the
report of another, and so from one to the other, Blakely was ever ready
with a prompt answer.

The Chiefs and Ephraim watched and wondered at Blakely and his constant
readiness to entertain them, meanwhile giving orders to hundreds of the
workers who were crowding about. It was an object lesson of what
business meant, and the boys felt proud and happy to see the great
ability which he displayed.

But what a happy day it was for the Professor. He and John were in close
conference, after the formal introductions were over. "There is
something brewing," said George as he nudged Harry, and cast a glance
toward the place where they stood in earnest conversation.

"I do believe John is telling him about the copper box; and by the way,
he has never spoken about that since we took it out of the cave. That is
just what he is doing; see, he is indicating the size of it."

Harry laughed, as he answered: "I am satisfied they will not do anything
rash, without consulting us," and George laughed at Harry's view of the
case.

They had been absent from the island a little over a month. During their
absence the new hotel was completed and was now in running order. This
became the headquarters for the visitors. While it was only two stories
in height, it contained nearly a hundred rooms, and the utmost effort
was made to make all of them comfortable.

The boys had their own rooms, and could not be induced to give them up.
John and the Professor also maintained their old rooms, which were most
comfortable, and attached to the Professor's apartments was a large room
where the people came daily to see him and consult about their many
wants.

He never failed to see them. It mattered not who called, it was
unvarying custom to greet all alike. The affection for him in the minds
of the people grew stronger day by day.

There were now five of the Chiefs on Wonder Island permanent residents
in Unity. A great change had come over the feelings of the people with
respect to the ownership of land. When the town was laid out, and the
people began to flock to the place, attracted by its many advantages,
it began to look for a time as though the different Chiefs soon would
find themselves without subjects.

In addition to this the Professor recognized that too many of the people
were expecting to be put to work in the city, and this would cause
agriculture to be abandoned, whereas it was obvious that they must
depend upon the soil for sustenance.

John and the Professor therefore developed a plan which would be the
means of keeping the people in their own sections, or, at least,
encourage them to till the ground.

The Chiefs in Wonder Island owned the soil. Their people reserved to
themselves the right to hunt and to gather the fruits and nuts necessary
to sustain life. But they had no right whatever, independently of the
Chiefs.

The first step, therefore, was to gain the consent of these rulers to a
division of the land, so that all their people might have farms. Uraso
and Muro were the first to agree to the plan, and it was quickly
followed by all except the Tuolos and the Illyas.

The Chiefs themselves, under this plan, were to receive one quarter of
the acreage, and of the residue, one-third was to be turned into what
was called a state fund, to be used for schools and for administrative
purposes, while the balance was to be given to the people, who were to
select their own land.

For the purpose of enabling proper deeds to be made, it was necessary to
make a survey of the islands, and this had been completed six months
previously, so that many of the people who now understood that the lands
selected belonged to them, and could not be taken from them without
their consent, were only too happy to consent to remain on their own
land.

But here another problem presented itself. It was desirable that the
people should build homes on these farms, and Blakely and John evolved
the plan to provide certain quantities of lumber, at a low price, to be
paid for from the products of the land. This had a most stimulating
effect, and applications were coming in from every quarter. As a result
small saw mills were put up in the territorial limits of each of the
tribes, so that it was an easy matter for the people to get the lumber
near home.

But that which taxed the energies of Blakely most, was to provide the
farming implements and the seed and instruction necessary to start them
on the way. As it was impossible to provide all the tools and implements
required for this purpose, Blakely had recourse to the States, and by
inserting a few advertisements in the agricultural papers throughout our
country, it was not long before the implements were forthcoming, all of
which were paid for from the reserve fund which had been provided.

And now another thing of the utmost importance happened. It was noised
about from Maine to California that there was an immense opportunity to
make money in the now well-known Wonder Island. Every return trip of the
_Wonder_ from the nearest South American port, brought Americans, with
funds to invest in plantations and in setting out coffee trees and
banana groves.

Many Americans came from the great ranches of South America,
particularly Brazil, which furnishes full three-fourths of all the
coffee of commerce. These men went through the islands and began the
barter for the lands.

At first this was encouraged, but it was soon, discovered that the
shrewd, and, more frequently than otherwise, the unscrupulous traders
were cheating the unsophisticated people, so that the Professor had to
take a firm hand, and declare that no transfers would be made until the
sales had been investigated.

This made the prices of lands go up by leaps and bounds, and the
Professor told the people that they should not sell their holdings, as
it would be much better for them to own and till the farms than to sell
them and then work for the owners.

All this tended to make the people appreciate that they really owned
something--that they had wealth and power within their grasp. Then
began, or rather was carried out more systematically, the founding of
schools, and by many means the parents themselves were induced to attend
the schools.

All were taught English. With the large funds that the state had
obtained in selling a portion of the state lands, the Professor sent for
teachers from the United States, and these came prepared to take up the
work all over the island.

The most interested workers were the Korinos, as they were called on
Rescue Island, and Krishnos on Wonder Island. The Professor's first
work, after the conquest of the savages, was to educate those people for
teaching, and in this they were found to be very efficient workers.

The Korinos brought from Rescue were placed under the tuition of the
Krishnos, and it was surprising to see how happily they regarded their
lot, and what progress they made after they understood what was
required.

Although we have not a full account of all the products shipped from
Wonder Island during the first six months, it might be stated that
during the last thirty days, the shipments from the port of Unity,
comprised 60,000 pounds of coffee, eighteen tons of bananas, and six
hundred quintals of spices, besides over four hundred tons of fibres, of
which jute formed one-half.

It is estimated that within another year, when many of the large
plantations should be ready to yield their products, that amount would
be increased to such an extent that several additional ships would be
necessary to carry the tonnage.

The foregoing is particularly instanced to show what John could point
out to the Chiefs who were now their guests, and to impress upon them
the necessity and value of adopting such a land system as they had
established.

Ephraim readily understood and approved of the plan, but it was not so
easy for Ta Babeda, and Beralsea. At the quiet suggestion of John the
opportunity was made whereby they were constantly thrown into contact
with the resident chiefs. Within a week they accepted the suggestions
and a half dozen surveyors were commissioned to go to the islands and
take up the work of surveying the lands, and making records, which were
to be put into such form that the Chiefs would understand them.

One day Ephraim, in conversation with John said: "I want my boys to
remain with you until they receive their education. I see that the
opportunities for work are unlimited, and I would also like to send over
a number of young men for the same purpose."

"Your decision pleases us immensely," said John, "and I have been
wondering why your daughter would not also like to remain for a time, as
there is much she can learn that will be of great help to you."

Ephraim was silent for a while, while he looked at John, and he finally
answered: "That means my wife will remain here also. But that has my
hearty consent. It will be for their good, and for the good of my
people."

It was not long before Ta Babeda heard of Ephraim's decision, and he
adapted the same course to the delight of his children. As for Beralsea,
his favorite daughter was already the wife of the Chief Sutoto, of the
Berees, and it was certain that she would remain in Unity, so that there
was no difficulty in getting his consent to sending his children and
others who would carry on the work of education.

But the boys had not, in the meantime, forgotten their factory. The old
water wheel was still there. Money could not purchase it, and they would
not permit its removal. It was the same old crude wheel built nearly
three years before at the Cataract, at the other end of the island, not
more than two miles from the rocky shore where the sea gave them up.

After the return there had been so much to see and to learn, about the
new developments, and the visitors required so much attention that the
boys quite forgot the copper box, and to inquire about the condition of
the paralyzed man who was found at Hutoton.

"The Professor has just told me," remarked John, "that the old man is
improving, and hopes that within another month he will be able to talk."

"Has he any idea of what his name is?"

"Not in the least. He keeps mumbling something about _the triangle_, or
something of that kind, but that is, of course, unintelligible."

"I understand Retlaw is improving, also?"

"Yes; we have thought of bringing the two men together, as soon as the
paralytic is so improved that he can talk."

"I have often wondered what kind of a disease paralysis is?" inquired
Harry.

"Paralysis is not a disease of itself. It is merely a sign of some
disorder of the nervous system. It may be shown by complete disability
on one side of the body, or in some particular portion, and only certain
sets of nerves may be affected."

"But what seems so singular is, that he is not only unable to speak but
he cannot move about."

"The form of paralysis, which affects the memory, is called _dementia
paralytica_, and attacks the brain, while some portion of the body also
may be affected."

"Isn't it curable?"

"There is little hope for a permanent cure. If the attack should come on
suddenly it is the most dangerous. Where it seems to approach gradually,
there is more likelihood of being able to check it."

"In what way is there an improvement in the old man?"

"So far as the bodily ailment is concerned he is gaining. When he was
brought back he was unable to utter a single word, nor could he move
himself in any way, except with one arm, and that only to a small
degree. Now he is able to shuffle along, across the room, and sometimes
tries to say something, which is not distinct. The only thing which thus
far seems intelligible is the word _triangle_, as I have stated."

"Harry spoke about the copper box this morning. Have you opened it yet?"
asked George.

"Oh, no! I wouldn't think of doing it unless you were present. The
Professor and I have had several talks about it, but we have all been so
busy that the matter has been deferred from time to time. I hope we
shall be able to get at it to-night."

While thus engaged in conversation the Professor appeared, smiling and
happy. The boys greeted him affectionately, as was their custom always.

"Do you want to make a visit with me?" he asked.

"Yes; where?" asked George.

"We will go out on B Street first," he answered.

Together they passed the large school house, and crossed the open
square, and entered the most beautiful of all the streets, the one laid
out with rows of trees along the curbs, and flower beds along the middle
portion of the driveway.

"Can you guess where we are going?" asked the Professor.

"No."

"Do you see the newly-painted house to the right?"

"Is that where Sutoto lives?"

"Yes; there is Cinda. Isn't she happy, though?"

They went in and were accorded a happy welcome. Her father, the Chief,
Beralsea, and her mother, Minda, were there, but Sutoto was absent.

"And where is the bridegroom?" asked the Professor.

"He is in the yard somewhere. I will call him." And she tripped out the
steps, merry as a lark.

Sutoto came in, and the boys simply shouted at his appearance. He was
covered with dirt and grease, and made no great effort to conceal the
fact.

"And what have you been up to?" asked George.

"Come out and I will show you."

In the little "garage," if it might be so termed, was an auto, one which
Sutoto had purchased and brought back with him on his wedding trip. "I
was going to send for you," he said, addressing Harry, "because I have
been having trouble with the carbureter."




CHAPTER XVI

THE SAVAGES AT UNITY


The boys were simply wild with delight, and George commenced to laugh
immoderately, after viewing the brightly-polished machine.

"What is the matter? Anything wrong? Is it upside down?" asked Sutoto.

"No; I was just thinking how funny it seems that one of the wild savages
of the island should be the first to import an automobile."

Sutoto didn't in the least mind this allusion to his former condition,
but the boys were the only ones who dared to jest with him in this
manner. He joined in the laugh, but quickly replied:

"But I am not the only one favored in this way."

"Why not?"

"I know some other people who are indulging in pleasure cars also."

"Who is that?"

"Well, Blakely has one, a fine little car he calls a 'runabout.'"

"He never said anything about it. Then he brought one over for John, and
another for the Professor, but you must keep quiet; they are not to know
anything about it."

"Then there are two more machines down there that have queer names on
them, because the fellows themselves are peculiar, and are awfully
civilized," said Sutoto, with a faint attempt at a smile.

Harry laid down the wrench and turned to Sutoto. "What are the names?"
he asked, for the first time interested.

"On one it says 'Mayfield,' and 'Crandall' on the other." And Sutoto
said this without cracking a smile, or indicating that he really knew
who the names applied to.

Probably, no one on the island, at least among the natives, really knew
the boys by any other designation than George and Harry. The surnames
were of no use. Sutoto was simply "Sutoto," and no more, and so with
Uraso and Muro.

The Professor and the old Chief heard the hilarity, and were soon out of
the house, and although the boys and Sutoto tried to push the machine
behind the garage, they were too late for the Professor's quick eye.

He laughed when he saw the commotion. "It is all right; if I were not so
old, I would get one myself."

"That's just the time you need it," said Harry. "By the way," he
continued, "I will bring it around to your place this afternoon."

"Bring what?" asked the Professor.

"Your car; of course." And Sutoto and the boys laughed at the
Professor's discomfiture.

"I thought there was some job about to be put up on me. I wondered why
Blakely tried to keep me out of the warehouse yesterday."

But while this merry scene was taking place, five new machines were
coming along B Street, with Blakely in the first one, and a competent
chauffeur in each of the others.

"The first is yours, Harry, and the next one, with the red body is
yours, George," said Blakely. "I thought we should surprise you."

"Why, there is John, too!" exclaimed Sutoto.

"Yes; he is in his car; he was greatly surprised. But the Professor's
car is a neat one; don't you think so?"

The boys had no ears for any one or for anything. Each was a forty-horse
power roadster, while the Professor's car had a five-passenger body, was
handsomely upholstered, and equipped with particularly easy-riding
springs. John's machine was equally well built, and after the boys had
made a full examination of their own treasures, they investigated the
other cars, and marveled at their beauty and appearance of comfort.

The procession of the machines naturally attracted the people who came
from all directions to witness the wonder wagons which ran by
themselves. They crowded around, and listened to every comment. The old
Chief was the one most excited at the strange things.

Neither Sutoto nor Cinda had informed them of the autos, because it was
intended to have quite a surprise party, and it was afterwards learned
that Blakely and Sutoto had planned to give all of them a surprise. The
fact that the Professor and the boys, having gone to Sutoto that
morning, were absent from their homes, precipitated to disclosure, so
that John was found and together they went to Sutoto's house.

You may be sure that it did not take the boys long to learn the
mysteries of the machines, and they were with Sutoto, until he got the
hang of the motor, and could spin along as fast as any of them.

The old Chief was finally induced to get into the Professor's machine,
and the latter instructed the driver to proceed slowly. Minda, who was
with them, was the braver of the two, by far. The speed was about six
miles an hour, at which the Chief marveled.

Then, gradually, the driver speeded up, until they were making a
comfortable speed of fifteen miles an hour. As confidence increased the
pleasure grew stronger, and before they returned on the first trip he
was as determined as could be to have one for his own use.

Blakely took note of his wish, and said: "I shall see to it that on the
return trip one of the machines will be shipped to you, but it will be
two weeks before the _Wonder_ comes in."

From that day on Sutoto had his hands full entertaining the Chief, but
the boys relieved him of much of this, by taking him from place to
place, where he saw the work going on in all parts of the beautiful
country, and witnessed the planting of the groves, the gathering of the
crops, and the way in which the produce was handled at the wharf.

Sutoto's home was a beautiful structure of five rooms, all nicely
furnished, the gift of the Professor. The boys enjoyed the visits there.
Sutoto was always a boy to them, and Cinda a happy bride,--and a woman
of whom any one might be proud.

When Beralsea, her father, decided that his children must remain and
attend the schools there, the adjoining cottage was prepared for them,
and Minda consented to stay, but Beralsea, who had now partaken of the
commercial instincts, under the tutelage of Blakely, was determined to
return at once and revolutionize the condition of affairs in Venture
Island.

That day he and Ta Babeda had a long conversation, and together they
visited John and Ephraim, and then called in Blakely. The boys were
present, of course, and it then turned out that they had agreed upon a
plan to start the agricultural work in the two islands conjointly, and
the only question which remained was to take care of the management of
the work.

Both of the Chiefs declared that they did not possess the qualifications
to direct the work, and Ephraim pleaded age as the reason why it would
be impossible to undertake the burdens.

"I have an idea," he said, "that the best solution would be to make
George and Harry the managers for the islands. I have been with the boys
for some time, and see what they are capable of, and every one would be
glad to work under them."

The boys were, of course, somewhat confused at the encomium, and the
Professor came to their rescue. "These are my boys," he said. "I have
known them ever since they came to the island. They have been with me
under every condition of service. We have had hours and days of
pleasure, and of trials, such as few have undergone, and always,
whatever the circumstances, they have been manly, and never gave up,
although sometimes things seemed hopeless.

"You have seen how, through their ingenuity, they have built the water
wheel, the mills and the factories. Fortune has been kind to them; they
do not need the money that may come to them, as they have found riches
here, far greater than you know, but they have loved the work, for the
pleasure it has brought them, and it is for them to decide."

"Harry and I have talked about these things many times," answered
George. "When we first came to the island, we had nothing. For our own
preservation we set about to better our condition, began to build the
things necessary to maintain life, and to protect ourselves.

"What at first was a necessity, later became a pleasure, because we
could see, day after day, how we built the shop and the machinery out of
the crude things; it would be hard to leave that work now."

Harry approvingly nodded his head, as he responded: "I consider it a
pleasure to do anything which would help the people here. George and I
feel that it would be wrong to leave them, so long as we can be of
service to them.

"The money we have will not make us happy; that I know, unless we can
use it to do some good. And it is so with our time, also. I am as
willing to give that as money, because we have been amply rewarded and
now our duty is to the people here."

As a result of the conference it was agreed that George and Harry should
take up the management of the affairs on Venture and Rescue Islands,
they to decide which should be the particular sphere of each.

The Chiefs were immensely pleased at this arrangement, and the first
steps were taken to put their plans into execution.

John advised them that they should decide which island each would take,
and then each should cultivate the acquaintance of the young men that
the Chiefs should select, so that the administrative functions could be
instilled into them, and that they might be taught the business
qualifications necessary.

George laughingly remarked that as the Chief Beralsea had so
accommodatingly captured him, when they first arrived on the island, he
thought that their intimate acquaintance, which was so long prior to
Harry's should decide the matter in his favor, by taking Venture Island.

"That suits me all right. I have one advantage over you on Rescue
Island; and that is the caves. You haven't even an excuse for a cave."

"But I have Hutoton, that terrible place where the criminals live,"
retorted George, with a laugh.

"And that reminds me; what about the copper box?"

The boys wended their way to the Professor, and were delighted to find
John there. "Before we go we want to have the copper box opened,"
remarked Harry.

"I have just brought it around, in the machine," said John, as he
noticed the boys peering at it through the window.

"What is that in the package lying on the box?"

"Can't you guess?"

"No."

"Have you forgotten the skull with the inscription on it?"

"Do you mean the skull we found on the headland at the eastern end of
the island?"

"Yes."

"Why, what is that for? Do you think it has anything to do with the
box?"

"Probably not; but I was curious to examine it further in view of the
similarity of the chart and the inscription."

The boys could not possibly understand what was meant by such a
reference. While they were talking the Professor entered the room, and
remarked, "I have just come from the old fellow, and his reason is
returning under the treatment, and he is also better physically."

"Do you mean the paralytic?"

"Yes; but there is one thing which is singular, and that is the constant
muttering of the word _triangle_. This morning I could plainly
distinguish several other words, such as 'of' and 'three,' and 'very
well,' and parts of other words, showing that in time, if his
improvement continues, we may get more information."

"I have an idea," hurriedly shouted George as he broke for the door.
"Wait for me," he said, as he turned around and cast a glance back into
the room. "I will be back at once," were the last words they heard.

John laughed at George's precipitous flight. "I suppose he has just
thought of something that bears on the case. In the meantime, and while
George is away, you, Harry, might get a hammer and a cold chisel. We
may have to cut the top off."

Harry rushed out and taking John's machine was quickly at the shop,
where he secured a hammer and several cold chisels capable of cutting
the copper.

When he returned George was there, and was unfolding the paper scrap
which they found below the skull. "Probably, this will explain the
triangle," said George, as he pointed to the V-shaped mark. "The upper
part of it is very likely worn away, so that we cannot see it."

John smiled at the suggestion as he took the paper and carefully
examined it. "Your view may be correct," he responded.

"That looks like a suggestion of a line," said Harry, pointing to a
faint scratch near the upper margin.

The Professor's messenger came in hurriedly, and announced that the
paralytic had sent for him. "I will return by the time the box is
opened," said the Professor, as he hurriedly went out of the door.

"Now for the box," said Harry. The slitting chisel was applied, and he
dextrously cut along the top, under the directions of John.

"Direct the chisel downwardly, to see if there is any seam to be found
along the side," directed John.

"Yes; here is the place where the top was put on," shouted Harry.

"Why, it has been soldered," said George. "Well, that means business."

It was evident that the soldering was effectively done, because the
solder had run entirely through the seam, and it was really sweated on.
The copper used was about an eighth of an inch thick, and the soft and
ductile character showed that it was pure metal.

"Be very careful as you get around so as not to disturb the contents, by
the falling of the lid," said John.

It still adhered at various places, and this was carefully cut away by
one of the thin chisels, and the lid finally raised at one corner,
sufficiently to disclose a portion of the contents, which appeared to be
round and white, and resting near the center of the space.

All caught a glimpse of it, and involuntarily started back in surprise.
It was a skull, the counterpart of the one lying on the table which
contained the inscription.

"Open it wide," said John in a peculiar voice, and as he did so the
Professor rushed in and announced that the paralytic had recovered
speech, and he had ordered him to be brought in.

While the Professor was saying this, John was slowly raising the lid,
and by a quick motion tore it away, and the Professor was actually taken
aback at the sight before him. He gazed for a moment, and then muttered:
"And the same inscription too!"

All looked toward it in amazement, and while puzzling over its meaning,
the paralytic was helped in by two attendants. He came forward, saw the
two skulls, and before either could prevent it he collapsed and fell to
the floor, apparently lifeless.

He was gathered up and placed on a couch, and restoratives applied by
the Professor. He lay thus in a stupor for more than a half hour, but
soon returning consciousness began to manifest itself, and when he
opened his eyes, and glanced about, his lips began to move. Here the
Professor held up a warning hand, which he seemed to heed, for he
immediately closed his eyes, and was soon asleep, as his breathing
became regular, and the pulse began to act normally.

"There must be no more agitation now," said the Professor. "We can take
the box to the adjoining room." This was done, and John carefully lifted
the skull from its resting place, bringing with it a mass of other
material, which looked like brown or discolored parchment.

The skulls were placed side by side. They were singularly alike, the
inscription of the one found on the headland, was on the left side, and
the like figures of the one taken from the box were on the right side.

"That is a singular thing," said Harry.

"So it is," answered John, "but it doubtless has a meaning," he
continued.

Beneath the box, and attached to the wrappings, was a mass of material
which John eagerly seized, and began to unwrap, while the Professor
interestedly looked on. There was not the first sign of any treasure in
the box, and when the several folds of the parchment were unrolled, the
boys could see the hieroglyphics that the Professor and John so eagerly
scanned.

"Yes, yes, I knew you would come back," said the man in the adjoining
room, and John dropped the parchment and followed the Professor into the
room, where they saw the old man sitting on the couch and staring about
with an inquiring countenance.

"What is your name?" said the Professor.

He did not answer at first but looked at John and the Professor in
amazement.

"Why do you ask?" he then muttered, without changing his countenance. "I
have told you over and over," he continued.

"Do you know where you are?" asked John.

"Certainly. You may ask Walter about that."

"Walter? Do you know Walter?" asked George, almost involuntarily.

He smiled and nodded his head. "He is here. I saw him yesterday. I wish
he would explain." Then he dropped back on the couch and remained
motionless.

The effort to arouse him was useless, and the Professor advised
patience. There was something so peculiar about the whole situation that
it fascinated the boys. What did this man know about Walter? Possibly,
through him the great mystery, that commenced with the note in the seat
of their boat, would be explained.

After they came back to the island, Retlaw rapidly recovered, and was
frequently found wandering around the town. On several occasions he
called on the Professor. To the surprise of all he appeared at this
time, surprised to find John and the boys present, and appeared to be
terribly startled on seeing the two skulls.

The moment he saw the paralytic, he became agitated, and started for the
door. John barred the way, and said: "Do you know that man?"

In a hesitating voice, he answered: "Yes; I know him well. Where did you
find him?" and notwithstanding he saw the quiet figure he drew back with
an expression of fear and hesitancy.

George slyly drew forth the Walter note, referred to in the previous
volume, "Adventures on Strange Islands," and handed it to John. The
latter seized it and said: "Did you ever see this?"

He grasped the paper, and answered: "Where did you get this? Did he have
it?"

"No," replied the Professor; "we found it in a recess at the end of a
seat in our boat,--the one we made on this island, three years ago."

"I do not know how it could have gotten there. It was written to
Clifford,--"

"John B. Clifford?" asked Harry in excitement.

Retlaw turned, when he heard Harry. "Yes," was the hesitating answer.

"Do you know Walter?" asked John.

He did not reply, but glanced at all of them, and while doing so Harry
came forward, and said: "Isn't your name Walter?"

The man started back and held up his hand: "What makes you think so?" he
asked in alarm.

"Because _Retlaw_ reversed, spells Walter," answered Harry.

It was time for the Professor to show surprise at the acuteness of
Harry's conclusions. John took the cue at once. "Why are you trying to
deceive us?"

He dropped his eyes, and was silent, and then he slowly turned to the
quiet man.

John noticed the movement. "Who was the man tied to the vessel and
wrecked on the island to the south of us?"

This question by John produced an added agitation in the deportment of
the man. He was visibly affected by the question, but there was no
reply.

"As you do not feel disposed to answer our questions we must detain or
keep you in custody until Clifford recovers," said John, and motioning
to the boys, they gathered around him, and called in the attendants and
ordered the men to take charge of him.

As they were about to pass out the door, Ephraim ascended the steps and
was about to pass into the open door. He caught sight of the curious
group, and when his eye alighted on the figure on the couch, he drew
back for a moment, while his gaze remained fixed.

Then he calmly moved forward, slowly shaking his head from side to side,
and muttered: "That looks like Clifford, my companion on the ship, and
the one who aided me to gain a foothold on the spar. How did he come
here?"

"That is the man we found at Hutoton," said John. "But do you know this
man?" he asked, pointing to Walter.

Ephraim turned, and scrutinized his face. "No, I have never seen him, to
my knowledge."

Walter moved back with a sigh of relief, while John and the Professor
looked at each other with puzzled expressions.

"Then the man we found tied to the boat was not Clifford!" exclaimed
George.

John looked at Walter, and he saw him grow pale.

"Who was the man," he asked, in a threatening tone, as he approached
Walter. The latter hesitated. "We are determined to ferret out this
matter, and it will be to your advantage to tell us the whole story, for
we shall find it out sooner or later."

"I must have time to think," he answered, as he put his hands to his
head, and turned to Clifford.

"You may have until to-morrow, but in the meantime, we shall see to it
that you are kept within our sight," responded John, as he motioned to
the men to take him away.

As he left the door Harry said: "Why do you suppose he wanted time?"

John looked at Clifford for a moment, and answered: "Evidently, he had
hopes that Clifford would not survive."




CHAPTER XVII

UNRAVELING THE MYSTERIES


At the suggestion of the Professor, Clifford was left in quiet, while
John and the boys deferred their further attempts to explore the
mysterious occurrences that were looming up.

They canvassed every phase of the situation, in the hope that some
explanation might be offered. What could have been the relations of
Walter and Clifford, and who was the man that met his death in the boat
at Venture Island?

Why had the sight of the copper box and the skulls so agitated Walter?
The latter, apparently, knew of the missive, which was, evidently,
written by him, but why did he not give an outright answer concerning it
when John asked him point blank?

It did not take the boys long to inform Sutoto of the development and
the mystery concerning the two men. The old Chief, Beralsea, was taken
over to see Walter, in order to identify him if possible, and then Harry
suggested that Ta Babeda might know something of his early history, as
Walter was found a prisoner at his village when John and the boys
arrived there.

Beralsea had never seen nor heard of him, and Ta Babeda gave the
following account of his capture: "About three years previously several
men, of whom Walter was one, arrived at the island, on a small boat,
something like the one carried by the _Pioneer_, and which was used at
the landing."

(It should be stated that one of the boats, and probably, the one
referred to, was the identical lifeboat, No. 3, which the boys had
fitted up for use on the _Pioneer_.)

"This boat was kept by them at the inlet directly east of the cave where
the Korinos were lodged. I did not know anything of this for some time,
but the Korinos learned of the presence of the men, and my warriors were
set to watch the men. A few days afterwards, another boat, much smaller,
appeared with two men, but from all appearances they were a different
party, and after they had a conference, it appeared as though there was
trouble between the different parties."

"We were about to close in on them, when at the height of their quarrel,
but they caught sight of us, and joined in resisting the attack against
us. With the guns they had we were no match for them, so we had to
retire to the village.

"The next morning we learned that they had gone, and on searching the
shore found something with marks on, it, that had no meaning to us so it
was destroyed."

"Was it something like this?" asked Harry, handing him a sketch.

The Chief studied it for a few moments, and answered: "It seems to me it
was like that. The marks were something like these," and he pointed to
the crosses.

Harry had made the identical marking which were on the two skulls,
which, it will be remembered, showed the characters + V, and below these
three X X X, followed by a star.

"I suspected as much," said John. "They were, quite possibly, on the
same quest. But where did they get the information?" And he turned to
the Professor for a possible explanation.

The latter was now thoroughly interested. "Unless Walter chooses to
tell, the matter may not be solved, unless Clifford recovers, and even
though he should regain his physical powers, the mind may have relapsed
into its late condition."

By agreement John and the boys remained at the Professor's home that
night, awaiting symptoms of the patient's disease, and during the night
they recounted over and over again the adventures they had undergone,
and the experiences with the natives.

They conversed about the new enterprise into which they were to embark,
and the Professor congratulated them on the decision to remain and enter
the commercial, or business field. "After all," he said, "there is
nothing which so broadens a man as to have an occupation, and give to
that business the energies of his mind."

"Of course, there are many things that the natives must learn, but they
are so willing to work, that it is a pleasure to show them," said Harry.
"The best men we have had in the shops were the common natives, but
there is one thing that has always been troublesome, and that is to give
them different names."

"That is just what I had in mind for some time," added George. "It
didn't make much difference where there were only a few,--a hundred or
so, but now, when we have three hundred or more it is rather confusing
to have a dozen or more _Lolos_, and as many more _Walbes_, and names
like that."

"It might be a good idea to suggest that each one have a sort of
surname, so that there will be no difficulty of that kind hereafter,"
suggested John.

"A family name would be the proper thing," added the Professor.

"For my part, I don't see how people can get along without it," remarked
George.

"But it has not always been the custom to have surnames, or family
names," suggested the Professor.

"But the Romans did," exclaimed George.

"Yes, they had three names: the first was the prenomen, which was a
distinctive mark of the individual; then the nomen, or the name of the
clan; and third, the cognomen, which was the family name. The first name
was usually written with a capital letter only, like M. Thus, M. Tullius
Cicero."

"Well, that is the first time it ever occurred to me that the Romans
parted their names in the middle," said George, as he smiled at the
allusion.

"The ancient Greeks, with the exception of a few of the leading families
in Athens and Sparta, had only a single name. Among the German and
Celtic nations each individual had only one name, and that was also true
of the ancient Hebrews; the names Abraham, David, Aaron and the others
were used singly, and this was also the case in Egypt, Syria and Persia,
and throughout all of Western Asia."

"But it has never been so in England, has it?" asked Harry.

"During the entire period that England was under the dominion of the
Saxons, the single name was prevalent. But that was changed later when
feudalism was established and the different lords began to gather their
vassals, and to register them."

"But what is the principle on which the names are built?"

"In various ways; at first they distinguished father and son by adding
the word _son_ to the father's name. If he was of German descent _sohn_
would be added; if of Danish origin, the word _sen_, so that the son's
name in either case would be William_son_, or Ander_sohn_, or
Thorwald_sen_, or a given name with the designation _son_ added."

"But how about the many other names, and those coming after the second
generation?"

"They had to be named after the locality, like John _Brook_, or David
_Hill_, or something of that kind, even to an occupation, like the
_Smiths_, or the _Fishers_, as well as qualifications, such as _Wise_
and _Good_ were adopted as surnames."

Every hour Clifford's condition was noted, and before morning his pulse
began to beat with greater regularity, and all felt that it would be
well to take a nap, to prepare for what they knew must be an
interesting, if not exciting chapter, to round out their adventures, and
to lay bare the few mysteries which yet remained to be solved.

Sutoto came to the Professor's house quite early, with news from Blakely
that Walter had disappeared. He had learned of the imprisonment and
that Walter was placed in the regular lock-up, where a few recalcitrants
were confined.

How he escaped was not known. True, not much of a guard was maintained,
and the natives had no idea that the prisoner was of more than ordinary
importance.

John was very much disappointed, but he felt that he alone was to blame,
because in the anxiety for Clifford he had entirely overlooked the
precaution necessary. He went down to the jail, with the boys, and
learned from the inmates that when the man was brought in he appeared to
be unconcerned, and immediately selected his sleeping quarters, and that
was the last they knew of him.

As the boys were going to their own rooms, a messenger came from the
Professor that Clifford was awake, and appeared to be rational, and was
now partaking of food. After breakfast they hurried over to the
Professor, and found John there smiling.

"I have had a little talk with him."

"What does he say?"

"I have not yet questioned him."

Clifford looked at the boys curiously. "Are you the boys that Mr. Varney
spoke about?"

"I suppose we are," said Harry.

"His story interested me very much. I learn that you have a regular
manufacturing town here, and that you built all these things without any
outside help, before you communicated with the outside world."

"Yes; and we had a glorious time doing it, too, but we owe everything to
the Professor and John."

"That is really commendable to hear you say so. But you said, Mr.
Varney, that Walter told you Clifford limped, and it was on account of
this peculiarity you were led to believe that the dead man on Venture
Island was Clifford?"

"One of the three men with Walter, was lame."

"Then it must have been one of his party that was murdered?"

"But Walter was explicit to tell us that one of your legs was shorter
than the other. I early learned that such was not the case, and that is
what confused me in identifying you. But there is also another thing
which I could not understand."

"What is that?"

"Ephraim Wilmar."

"Stop! stop!" almost shouted Clifford. "You said _Ephraim Wilmar_. Do
you know him?"

"Know him? He is here on the island."

"When did he come? Where is he?"

"He lives on an island north of the place we found you, and is Chief of
a tribe there."

"Chief of a tribe!" he exclaimed. "An island to the north,--the
_triangle_,"--and the boys rose from their seats in the excitement.

"Where is Walter's letter?--Quick," said Harry.

George fumbled in his pockets with eagerness. "Is that the triangle?"
eagerly questioned Harry.

"Yes, yes; there it is again. The three islands, and the arrow."

"But what does the star mean,--the star that follows, as you see?"

"That,--that is to show the position of the three islands."

"Position of the three islands? What islands? and how does it tell the
positions?" George was fairly frantic now.

"There must be three islands, and one of them was the one I was on when
you found me, and one is here, because Mr. Varney told me about this
one, and then there is another, which you said was to the north
of,--of--"

"Hutoton," said John.

"Yes; Hutoton. But the positions! Yes; you will understand! One point is
the Southern Cross, near the South polar Circle, the second point is the
fixed star Antares, and the third is the fixed star Spica, which,
together form a perfect triangle, one limb of which passes through a
cluster of stars called the Compasses."

"But what has that to do with the locations of the three islands?"

"They are situated, with relation to each other, exactly the same as the
three stars are placed in the heavens."

"What was the object of the three crosses before the star?"

"The three represented thirty."

"Thirty what?"

"Leagues."

"And the arrow?"

"The direction from Spica."

"Why from Spica?"

"Because that star is the one which represents the island on which this
particular chart happens to be found."

"Do you mean that a similar chart will be found on each island?"

"No; on only two of them."

The boys were astounded at this information. John and the Professor
remained quiet while the boys thus questioned Clifford.

John interrupted to inquire why there were only two charts.

"The record is found on the third."

"So Wonder and Venture Islands are the only ones which have the
inscriptions on the skulls?" asked Harry.

Clifford sat up with such a sudden start that the boys were alarmed. He
leaned forward, and hurriedly asked the following questions: "You say,
'Inscriptions on the skulls?' How do you know? and why do you say that
they are on Wonder and Venture Islands?"

"Because we have two of them."

He dropped back on the pillow, and reflected for some time, and then
slowly said: "But there must be three. One of them is still with the
records."

"No; we have the one with the records."

A smile illuminated his features, the tension was relaxed, and he
dropped back, and pressed his hands over his forehead, as he muttered:
"I am so glad, so glad, so glad," and his voice died down, and he
remained quiet, as though in sleep.

The questioners sat there in silence, and watched him as he slept. The
Professor motioned them to withdraw, and they passed into the adjoining
room.

"It is clear to me now," remarked John. "The knowledge of the record was
known to others, and I was not aware that any one besides ourselves
really had figured out the secret," remarked John, as he turned to the
Professor.

"Well, I came pretty close to it," exclaimed Harry. "I told you that the
three X's meant thirty leagues."

"So you did," said John. "Prior to the finding of the skull I did not
know of the full inscription. Its significance did not come to me until
we reached Venture Island."

"I remember now! I told George that I saw the chart you had made."

John smiled. "It would have deceived you, however."

"Why?" asked Harry.

"Because, if you remember it the third island was to the south of
Venture, and not to the north as we really found it."




CHAPTER XVIII

THE STORY OF THE LETTERED SKULL


It was late that afternoon when Clifford awoke, and plainly much,
refreshed, and improved physically. When he saw the Professor he said:
"I have not told you all, but I want the boys here for that purpose,
because I know it will interest them."

When the boys arrived they awaited the coming of John, who informed them
that Uraso had received word of the capture of Walter, but that he would
not arrive until noon.

Clifford greeted them effusively, and it was evident that he had
recovered his spirits, and was well on the road to recovery. After some
general talk on uninteresting topics, he began his story:

"I was on the vessel with Ephraim when we ran into the monsoon which
wrecked the vessel. After days of suffering I became unconscious, and
when the spar finally reached the shore, I was aroused sufficiently to
save myself, and after wandering around for some time, came up to a
tribe of natives, who took good care of me.

"I had no means of determining the latitude or longitude, because I was
then only about twenty years of age, and had shipped on the vessel at
Shanghai, because I was anxious to return home. I remained with the
people about three years, and they were called Osagas."

"Why, this town is built in the Osagas' territory," said Harry.

"That may be so, but it is enough for the present to know that it was
somewhere on this island that I reached the shore, and that about three
years thereafter I was fortunate enough to catch sight of a sailing
vessel, and on her I reached San Francisco.

"In course of time I built up a profitable shipping business, and owned
several vessels engaged in the coast and Alaska trade. Like all shipping
men on the western coast, I learned of the many accounts, most of them
fables, concerning the treasures on the islands in the South Seas, but
they never had any effect on me until about three years ago, I had a
hand in furnishing the outfit for a vessel which departed on such a
mission, that sailed some time in December or January, of that year."

"Do you know the name of the vessel?" asked John.

"Yes; the _Juan Ferde_. Why do you ask?"

"I sailed in that vessel with Blakely, one of the owners."

"Blakely? Blakely, did you say? Why he is the man who purchased all the
provisions from me."

"He is here on the island, and now has charge of all the business
matters connected with our venture."

"Well, that is remarkable, indeed; but I must proceed. Four months after
the _Juan Ferde_ sailed, I came into contact with a peculiar character,
who had been all over the southern part of the universe, and he finally
interested me sufficiently to look over some peculiar documents which he
had, bearing on the subject of the lost treasures, and from the
information which he gave, it occurred to me that the location could not
be far from the island where I was cast ashore.

"With a good business, and entirely free from all family entanglements,
I made up my mind that I would accompany him, and finance the
undertaking. What induced me more than anything else, was the fact that
the stories he told corresponded so nearly with the information which
Blakely gave me, although the latter did not go into many details, that
I looked on the venture in the nature of a lark. Besides I wanted to
meet my old friends on the island, and possibly induce them to gather
the products of the island for me.

"We sailed about five months after the _Juan Ferde_ left, and had a
quick run to the island where it was supposed I had been left years
before. It seems that at the time I landed there the tribe was at war,
and we had a terrible time to get away from the people, who, of course,
did not remember me, even though the tribe was the same, but of this I
had no absolute knowledge at the time.

"Two months after reaching the island, we sailed to the south, in order
to explore the second island, noted on the chart, and it was then that
the returning monsoon, which usually blows in the opposite direction
from the one of six months before, wrecked the vessel, and the next day
one of my companions and myself, who were so far as I then knew, the
only survivors, reached the southern shore of an island, where we saw
high mountains, so unlike those in the island where I was shipwrecked
years before."

"While I think of it," remarked John, "how did you know about the second
island, to which you refer?"

"I learned this from Walter."

"Then did you know anything about the skull on the headland, and the
note which Walter left?"

"I knew about the skull, but never heard of the note to which you refer.
The discovery of the skull was an accident, and I attached no importance
to it at the time. From the southern portion of the island we journeyed
along the eastern coast, to the north, skirting a large forest on the
way."

The boys looked at each other, significantly, but he did not notice
this.

"Then we reached a large river, and to our surprise, found a boat,
evidently of native manufacture, and with this floated down the stream
to the sea."

"But where did you get the rope that we found in the boat?" asked
George, eagerly.

He turned, and answered: "How did you know we put any rope on the boat?"

"Because that was the boat we made, and we found it afterwards, with the
strange rope and oars."

"Strange oars. I know nothing about them. We used the oars found in the
boat."

"Did you get the boat near a large falls?"

"Yes."

"And on the north side of the river?"

"Yes; but after we reached the sea, it was too rough, and the wind was
blowing too heavily from the north to make it safe to navigate in that
direction, so we went south, probably ten miles, and drew ashore. The
next morning when I awoke the boat and my companion were missing."

"Who was your companion?"

"Walter."

John looked indignant, and expressed his opinion very forcibly, but
Clifford held up his hand, restrainingly. "Do not be too harsh. I have
no ill will toward him. I did not know what to do, nor which way to
turn, but went to the west, and before night, came, unexpectedly, on the
remains of a fire, which led me to believe that I would find friends in
the inhabitants.

"I went on and on, and caught up with the band, and was then horrified
to find that they were having a feast, and sacrificing human beings. I
saw Walter among the captives, but I could not contrive to let him know
of my presence, and left the place as hurriedly as I could.

"After a month of struggling I reached the southern part of the island,
and there, to my joy, found three of my companions on a life boat,
belonging to a vessel called the _Investigator_, and together we made a
course southeast, and there found the location of the second skull."

"But you knew nothing of that at the time, did you?"

"I did not know what the marks on the skull were for, but the finding of
the second one was sufficient to revive in me the hope that, after all,
the treasure might be found. One of the men, who was the intimate of
Walter, figured out the course to be taken, and we reached the island to
the north the second day.

"There, to our surprise, we found Walter, and he charged one of the men
with me, with trying to secure the treasure, but I finally patched up
the matter, and we agreed to work in concert. Then, when the next day,
we found that Walter had lost the chart, we felt that it was a trick on
his part to deceive us, and we separated. At that time I did not believe
he told us the truth.

"Two days afterwards we passed a party of natives, who were not aware of
our presence, and then we saw that Walter, and the man with him, had
been captured, and later believed that they had been killed. We searched
the island, to find the cave, but were unsuccessful and thinking that an
error might have been made, we concluded to sail for the island to the
south.

"We found a tribe of natives when we landed, and owing to the exposure
and the trials we had gone through I was taken ill, and grew worse and
worse, and from that time on to the time I recovered two days ago, I had
not the slightest idea of what passed."

"When I spoke against Walter a few moments ago," said John, "you said he
was not to blame. What did you mean by that?"

"During my wanderings, I found parts of the chart, which, I assumed, had
been lost by John, and, probably, destroyed by the natives. The part I
recovered was of no value to me, but it entirely changed my opinion of
Walter."

But Clifford's story left something to be told. It did not explain why
Walter tried to avoid meeting Clifford; or why he was so startled upon
seeing the two skulls, or the reason for avoiding the reference to the
letter to which his name was signed.

The boys were so intensely interested in his story that they did not
notice the entrance of Blakely, who had brought Walter back, but when
Clifford saw Blakely there was immediate recognition.

Clifford held out his hand to Walter, as he said: "I did wrong in
doubting you. I understand from the statement made by Ta Babeda, that
they found the chart the next day, after we met them, and that, of
course, clears you."

"But I would like to know," said Harry, "what the other part of the
inscription on the skulls means?"

"Do you refer to the sign of plus and the V?"

"Yes."

"When you went into the cave, where you found the copper box, how many
chambers did you pass before coming to the large room?"

"I am not sure," he answered, "but I think four."

"Yes; and the case was found in the fifth chamber. The Plus sign
indicated the cross-shaped cave, did it not?"

"Yes, and there are several other things which interest me," remarked
George, gazing at John, as he continued: "Why should the inscriptions
have been marked on the skulls?"

John slowly shook his head, as he looked at Clifford. The latter gazed
vacantly into space, as though reflecting, and finally said: "I do not
know."

It will be remembered that when Walter entered the Professor's room,
where Clifford was lying, he appeared to be startled at the sight of
the skulls. The copper box which held one of them was in the adjoining
room.

During the foregoing conversation Walter was mute, nor did he appear
interested in the question propounded by George.

"It seems most curious to me that the skull taken from the copper box
has the inscription on the right side, whereas the other one has them on
the left side," observed Harry.

John and George saw the immediate change in Walter's face while Harry
was speaking. His agitation was now plain to all, and the perspiration
began to appear on his forehead.

John leaned forward as he said: "Do you know?"

Walter started at the vehemence of the question, and threw back his
head, as he answered: "Did you find the copper box?"

"Yes," responded John, with a look of triumph.

Walter's features relaxed, and he seemed to sink down, as he gazed about
him with a final look of despair.

"Then the quest is ended!" he muttered.

"What do you mean? Explain!" demanded John.

"When I began the search for the treasure of the caves, I was the owner
of the original document written by Juan Guiterez before he died in the
Spanish prison. Three attempts had been made to find the island, which
contained the secret, and that secret was in the copper box which told
of the places and the locations of the other caves. In each case the
quest failed, and all perished. The peculiar significance arises from
the fact that the only directions were given on a human skull by
Guiterez himself, who declared that two of the skulls would have the
inscriptions on the left side, while the one with the cryptic signs on
the right side would be accompanied by the descriptions of the locations
of all the Caves on the different islands."

"But why should there be three skulls?" asked George, in great
eagerness.

"There were three attempts, each resulting in death. The skull is
emblematic of death."

"Will you tell us why you tried to avoid Clifford, and were startled at
the sight of the skulls?" asked John.

"If, as you say, you have found the copper box, I have no further reason
to remain silent. I found one of the skulls,--the others I could not
find, one of which I knew must be in the treasure cave. If I had known
you found the one in the cave I should not have tried to get away, as I
hoped, finally, to find the cave. Since coming here I learned that you
had found the third island; I knew of only two, and supposed that the
two skulls were from those two, namely, Wonder and Venture Islands."

"But who placed the skulls there?" queried Harry.

"Ah! No one knows that. The Spaniard Guiterez offers no explanation. All
the so-called _treasure charts_ have been made from the accounts which
he gave, of the vast amount of gold and silver which is hidden in these
natural caches. The place where the copper box was deposited is the
grand mausoleum. Only those who know the secret could ever reach the
vault. All others would perish."

"The carbonic gas!" exclaimed George.

Walter turned to George, as he said this, but did not comprehend what he
meant. It was now evident that Walter had tried to conceal his identity,
and thereby hide the secret which would enable him alone to find the
vast wealth.

"So the letter which we found concealed in the seat of our boat, was
written by one of your companions?" asked Harry.

"Yes."

"This clears up the mysterious things which we have tried to fathom for
over two years," said John. "The meaning of the letters is now clear."

"From the time we landed on the island," rejoined the Professor, "we
found evidences of white people that we could not follow up, and it is
now plain that they were in search for the treasure, so we can now
comprehend what the notes meant."

There is but little more to add to the chapter pertaining to the
experiences of the boys on the islands. Perhaps, at some time in the
future, their work on the new islands will be told. What John and the
boys found in the Copper box, the historical sketches and the locations
of the treasure islands which were pointed out on the parchments found
in the compartment below the skull, were amazing revelations of the days
of piratical adventures, when the southern half of the world was one
vast carnival of crime, in which gold was the only booty and to obtain
which the means were always considered to be justified by the end.

Our young friends, during their experiences in southern waters, did
their part in bringing to the uneducated savages the blessings of
civilization and the great boon of peace. To themselves they brought a
store of hard-earned knowledge and a memory of things well done that
will last them to the end of their days.

THE END

      *       *       *       *       *




THE BOY GLOBE TROTTERS

By ELBERT FISHER

_12mo, Cloth.     Many Illustrations.     60c. per Volume_

       *       *       *       *       *

This is a series of four books relating the adventures of two boys, who
make a trip around the world, working their way as they go. They meet
with various peoples having strange habits and customs, and their
adventures form a medium for the introduction of much instructive matter
relative to the character and industries of the cities and countries
through which they pass. A description is given of the native sports of
boys in each of the foreign countries through which they travel. The
books are illustrated by decorative head and end pieces for each
chapter, there being 36 original drawings in each book, all by the
author, and four striking halftones.

1. FROM NEW YORK TO THE GOLDEN GATE, takes in many of the principal
points between New York and California, and contains a highly
entertaining narrative of the boys' experiences overland and not a
little useful information.

2. FROM SAN FRANCISCO TO JAPAN, relates the experiences of the two boys
at the Panama Exposition, and subsequently their journeyings to Hawaii,
Samoa and Japan. The greater portion of their time is spent at sea, and
a large amount of interesting information appears throughout the text.

3. FROM TOKIO TO BOMBAY. This book covers their interesting experiences
in Japan, followed by sea voyages to the Philippines, Hong-kong and
finally to India. Their experiences with the natives cover a field
seldom touched upon in juvenile publications, as it relates to the great
Hyderabad region of South India.

4. FROM INDIA TO THE WAR ZONE, describes their trip toward the Persian
Gulf. They go by way of the River Euphrates and pass the supposed site
of the Garden of Eden, and manage to connect themselves with a caravan
through the Great Syrian Desert. After traversing the Holy Land, where
they visit the Dead Sea, they arrive at the Mediterranean port of Joppa,
and their experiences thereafter within the war zone are fully
described.




THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS

BY J. S. ZERBE

CARPENTRY FOR BOYS


A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner all
subjects pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care and use of
tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; the principles
involved in the building of various kinds of structures, and the
rudiments of architecture. It contains over two hundred and fifty
illustrations made especially for this work, and includes also a
complete glossary of the technical terms used in the art. The most
comprehensive volume on this subject ever published for boys.

       *       *       *       *       *

ELECTRICITY FOR BOYS

The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental
principles in each phase of the science, and practically applying the
work in the successive stages. It shows how the knowledge has been
developed, and the reasons for the various phenomena, without using
technical words so as to bring it within the compass of every boy. It
has a complete glossary of terms, and is illustrated with two hundred
original drawings.

       *       *       *       *       *

PRACTICAL MECHANICS FOR BOYS

This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of practical
shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure and handling of
shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized to perform the work,
and the manner in which all dimensional work is carried out. Every
subject is illustrated, and model building explained. It contains a
glossary which comprises a new system of cross references, a feature
that will prove a welcome departure in explaining subjects. Fully
illustrated.

       *       *       *       *       *

_12mo, cloth.     Price 60 cents per volume_




The Ethel Morton Books

By MABELL S. C. SMITH

       *       *       *       *       *

This series strikes a new note in the publication of books for girls.
Fascinating descriptions of the travels and amusing experiences of our
young friends are combined with a fund of information relating their
accomplishment of things every girl wishes to know.

In reading the books a girl becomes acquainted with many of the
entertaining features of handcraft, elements of cooking, also of
swimming, boating and similar pastimes. This information is so imparted
as to hold the interest throughout. Many of the subjects treated are
illustrated by halftones and line engravings throughout the text.

LIST OF TITLES

  ETHEL MORTON AT CHAUTAUQUA
  ETHEL MORTON AND THE CHRISTMAS SHIP
  ETHEL MORTON'S HOLIDAYS
  ETHEL MORTON AT ROSE HOUSE
  ETHEL MORTON'S ENTERPRISE
  ETHEL MORTON AT SWEET BRIER LODGE

_Price 60 cents per volume; postpaid_




The Mountain Boys Series


1. PHIL BRADLEY'S MOUNTAIN BOYS

2. PHIL BRADLEY AT THE WHEEL

3. PHIL BRADLEY'S SHOOTING BOX

4. PHIL BRADLEY'S SNOW-SHOE TRAIL

These books describe with interesting detail the experiences of a party
of boys among the mountain pines.

They teach the young reader how to protect himself against the elements,
what to do and what to avoid, and above all to become self-reliant and
manly.


_12mo. * * * Cloth._

_40 cents per volume; postpaid_




THE HICKORY RIDGE BOY SCOUTS

A SERIES OF BOOKS FOR BOYS

By Capt. Alain Douglas, Scout-master

       *       *       *       *       *

THE CAMPFIRES OF THE WOLF PATROL

Their first camping experience affords the scouts splendid opportunities
to use their recently acquired knowledge in a practical way. Elmer
Chenoweth, a lad from the northwest woods, astonishes everyone by his
familiarity with camp life. A clean, wholesome story every boy should
read.

WOODCRAFT; OR, HOW A PATROL LEADER MADE GOOD

This tale presents many stirring situations in which the boys are called
upon to exercise ingenuity and unselfishness. A story filled with
healthful excitement.

PATHFINDER; OR, THE MISSING TENDERFOOT

Some mysteries are cleared up in a most unexpected way, greatly to the
credit of our young friends. A variety of incidents follow fast, one
after the other.

FAST NINE; OR, A CHALLENGE FROM FAIRFIELD

They show the same team-work here as when in camp. The description of
the final game with the team of a rival town, and the outcome thereof,
form a stirring narrative. One of the best baseball stories of recent
years.

GREAT HIKE; OR, THE PRIDE OF THE KHAKI TROOP

After weeks of preparation the scouts start out on their greatest
undertaking. Their march takes them far from home, and the good-natured
rivalry of the different patrols furnishes many interesting and amusing
situations.

ENDURANCE TEST; OR, HOW CLEAR GRIT WON THE DAY

Few stories "get" us more than illustrations of pluck in the face of
apparent failure. Our heroes show the stuff they are made of and
surprise their most ardent admirers. One of the best stories Captain
Douglas has written.

UNDER CANVAS; OR, THE HUNT FOR THE CARTARET GHOST

It was hard to disbelieve the evidence of their eyes but the boys by the
exercise of common-sense solved a mystery which had long puzzled older
heads.

STORM-BOUND; OR, A VACATION AMONG THE SNOW DRIFTS

The boys start out on the wrong track, but their scout training comes to
the rescue and their experience proves beneficial to all concerned.

       *       *       *       *       *

BOY SCOUT NATURE LORE TO BE FOUND IN THE HICKORY RIDGE BOY SCOUT SERIES,
ALL ILLUSTRATED:--

Wild Animals of the United States--Tracking--Trees and Wild Flowers of
the United States--Reptiles of the United States--Fishes of the United
States--Insects of the United States and Birds of the United States.

       *       *       *       *       *

_Cloth Binding     Cover Illustrations in Four Colors     40c. Per Volume_




The Campfire and Trail Series


1. IN CAMP ON THE BIG SUNFLOWER.

2. THE RIVALS OF THE TRAIL.

3. THE STRANGE CABIN ON CATAMOUNT ISLAND.

4. LOST IN THE GREAT DISMAL SWAMP.

5. WITH TRAPPER JIM IN THE NORTH WOODS.

6. CAUGHT IN A FOREST FIRE.

7. CHUMS OF THE CAMPFIRE.

8. AFLOAT ON THE FLOOD.

By LAWRENCE J. LESLIE.

A series of wholesome stories for boys told in an interesting way and
appealing to their love of the open.

_Each, 12mo.     Cloth.     40 cents per volume_




Christy Mathewson's Book

[Illustration: "WON IN THE NINTH"]

_A Ripping Good Baseball Story by One Who Knows the Game_

This book has attained a larger sale than any baseball story ever
published.

The narrative deals with the students of a large university and their
baseball team, the members of which have names which enable the reader
to recognize them as some of the foremost baseball stars of the day
before their entrance into the major leagues.

One gains a very clear idea of "inside baseball" stripped of wearisome
technicalities. The book is profusely illustrated throughout and
contains also a number of plates showing the manner in which Mathewson
throws his deceptive curves, together with brief description of each.

_Cloth bound 5-1/2 x 7-5/8      Price 60c. per volume_

       *       *       *       *       *


Mrs. Meade's Books for Girls

Primrose Edition

       *       *       *       *       *

Printed on fine quality book paper. Separate cover designs in colors.

Daddy's Girl.
A Girl from America.
Sue, a Little Heroine.
The School Queens.
Wild Kitty.
A Sweet Girl Graduate.
A World of Girls.
Polly--A New-Fashioned Girl.

       *       *       *       *       *

_Each, 12mo.    Cloth.     40 cents per volume_

       *       *       *       *       *

Mrs. Meade's girls' books never lose their popularity.




ECONOMICAL COOKING

_Primrose Edition_

_Planned for Two or More Persons_

By

MISS WINIFRED S. GIBBS

Dietitian and Teacher of Cooking of the New York Association for
Improving the Condition of the Poor

_Printed on Fine Quality Book Paper. Cover Design in Colors_

Many Cook Books have been published, from time to time, to meet various
requirements, or to elucidate certain theories, but very few have been
written to meet the needs of the large proportion of our population who
are acutely affected by the constantly increasing cost of food products.
Notwithstanding that by its valuable suggestions this book helps to
reduce the expense of supplying the table, the recipes are so planned
that the economies effected thereby are not offset by any lessening in
the attractiveness, variety or palatability of the dishes.

Of equal importance are the sections of this work which deal with food
values, the treatment of infants and invalids and the proper service of
various dishes.

The recipes are planned for two persons, but may readily be adapted for
a larger number. The book is replete with illustrations and tables of
food compositions--the latter taken from the latest Government
statistics.

_Cloth Binding Illustrated 40c. per volume, postpaid_




CUT-OUT AND PAINT BOOKS

[Illustration]

An original line of art studies printed in full rich colors on high
grade paper. This series introduces many novel features of interest, and
as the subject matters have been selected with unusual care, the books
make a strong appeal not only to the little ones but even to those of
riper years.

POST CARDS              _Painting Book_

DOLLS OF ALL NATIONS    _Scissors Book_

OUR ARMY                _Scissors Book_

CHILDREN'S PETS         _Puzzle Book_


_Size 8-1/4 x 10-1/4 inches_

PRICE 15C. PER COPY


  THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
  147 FOURTH AVENUE    NEW YORK



***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: TREASURES OF
THE ISLAND***


******* This file should be named 21810.txt or 21810.zip *******


This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/8/1/21810



Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
will be renamed.

Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
redistribution.



*** START: FULL LICENSE ***

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
https://www.gutenberg.org/license).


Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works

1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.  See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.

1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
States.

1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org

1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
1.E.9.

1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.

1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.

1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg-tm License.

1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
that

- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."

- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
     License.  You must require such a user to return or
     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
     Project Gutenberg-tm works.

- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
     of receipt of the work.

- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.

1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
your equipment.

1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.

1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.


Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm

Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.


Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.

The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact

For additional contact information:
     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
     Chief Executive and Director
     gbnewby@pglaf.org

Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
To donate, please visit:
https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate


Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.

Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.

Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:

     https://www.gutenberg.org

This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.